Page 1 Color Printer d-Color MF651 d-Color MF551 d-Color MF451 SERVICE MANUAL Code Y110571-1...
Page 3: Safety And Important Warning Items
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them before doing service work. IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Page 4: Safety Warnings
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY OLIVETTI BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. OLIVETTI brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
Page 5 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [2] POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
Page 6: Connection To Power Supply
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE OLIVETTI brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi- neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure.
Page 7 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord WARNING • When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly.
Page 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring WARNING • Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. • When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Page 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation CAUTION • The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a.
Page 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING • Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
Page 11 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
Page 12: Handling Of Consumables
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec- tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte- nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Page 13 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials CAUTION • Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. •...
Page 14 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [4] Used Batteries Precautions ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Page 15: Internal Laser Radiation
Internal Laser Radiation semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW d-Color MF651 19.2 µW d-Color MF551 Maximum average radiation power (*) 16.3 µW d-Color MF451 16.3 µW...
Page 16 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation) • This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan- dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Page 17 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland, Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! • Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat- taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser- säteilylle. puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW aallonpituus 775-800 nm VARNING!
Page 18: Laser Safety Label
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Laser Safety Label • A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below. * Only for the U.S.A. A0P0P0E507DA Laser Caution Label • A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below. A0P0P0C503DA S-16...
Page 19: Precautions For Handling The Laser Equipment
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT • When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications. • When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
Page 20: Warning Indications On The Machine
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock. WARNING Do not burn used toner cartridges.
Page 21 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
Page 22 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
Page 23 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
Page 24 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT Blank Page S-22...
Page 25: Composition Of The Service Manual
Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options. Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part.
Page 26: Notation Of The Service Manual
Notation of the service manual A. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) d-Color MF651/MF551/MF451: Main body (2) Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT...
Page 27 Color Printer d-Color MF651 d-Color MF551 d-Color MF451 SERVICE MANUAL Code Y110571-1...
Page 29: Table Of Contents
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 CONTENTS d-Color MF651/MF551/MF451 Main body OUTLINE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION................... 1 d-Color MF651/MF551 ..................1 d-Color MF451...................... 3 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................5 Type ........................5 Functions ......................6 Paper ........................8 Materials ....................... 9 Print volume......................10 Machine specifications..................
Page 30 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 CMS corresponding parts................... 27 3.4.1 CMS corresponding parts................27 3.4.2 CMS corresponding parts list ..............27 3.4.3 Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set ..........27 Concept of parts life ................... 28 3.5.1 Life value of consumables and parts ............28 3.5.2 Conditions for life specifications values ............
Page 31 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4.10.8 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller ............65 4.10.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller....................67 4.10.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy ......69 4.11 Vertical conveyance section................70 4.11.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover............
Page 32 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.17 Scanner front cover..................88 5.5.18 USB interface cover ..................88 5.5.19 Original glass ....................89 5.5.20 Interface cover/1 ..................90 5.5.21 Interface cover/2 ..................90 5.5.22 Rear right cover/1 ..................91 5.5.23 Rear right cover/2 ..................91 5.5.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover..............
Page 33 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.54 How to open PWB box/1 ................135 5.5.55 PCI board (PCIB) ..................136 5.5.56 MFP board (MFPB) ................... 137 5.5.57 How to open PWB box/2 ................140 5.5.58 High voltage unit/2 (HV2) ................140 5.5.59 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB)............
Page 34 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.91 Cleaner motor (M38)................. 184 5.5.92 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21)........188 5.5.93 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14).............. 188 5.5.94 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13).............. 189 5.5.95 Toner supply motor/Y (M9), toner supply motor/M (M10), toner supply motor/C (M11), toner supply motor/K (M12) ......
Page 35 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.7.1 Fusing unit ....................227 SERVICE TOOL ....................229 Service material list ..................229 CE tool list......................229 FIRMWARE REWRITING ................... 231 Outline ......................231 USB memory ....................231 7.2.1 Preparation ....................231 7.2.2 Procedure ....................
Page 36 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.4.6 Create User Box-Bulletin Board User Box ..........273 10.4.7 Create User Box-Relay User Box ............. 273 10.4.8 Limiting Access to Destinations ..............274 10.4.9 Limiting Access to Destinations-Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations ..274 10.5 User Settings ....................
Page 37 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.5.33 Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation........288 10.5.34 Copier Settings-Automatic Image Rotation ..........288 10.5.35 Copier Settings-Finishing Program ............289 10.5.36 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings ............289 10.5.37 Scan/Fax Settings-JPEG Compression Level ........... 290 10.5.38 Scan/Fax Settings-Black Compression Level..........
Page 38 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.9 System Settings-Reset Settings ............... 346 10.6.10 System Settings-User Box Settings ............348 10.6.11 System Settings-Standard Size Setting............ 350 10.6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings .............. 351 10.6.13 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings ..........351 10.6.14 System Settings-Application Key Settings ..........351 10.6.15 System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings ..........
Page 39 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.46 Network Setting-TCP Socket Settings ............397 10.6.47 Network Setting-Network Fax Setting ............398 10.6.48 Network Setting-WebDAV Settings ............399 10.6.49 Network Setting-Web Service Settings ............. 401 10.6.50 Network Setting-SSDP Settings..............404 10.6.51 Network Setting-Detail Settings ..............404 10.6.52 Network Settings-IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings ......
Page 40 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.83 Security Settings-Administrator Password..........433 10.6.84 Security Settings-User Box Admin. Setting ..........433 10.6.85 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels ........434 10.6.86 Security Settings-Security Details ............434 10.6.87 Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode ..........440 10.6.88 Security Settings-HDD Settings..............441 10.6.89 Security Settings-Function Management Setting........
Page 41 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.15 Printer Resist Loop ................... 475 12.4.16 Color Registration Adjustment-Cyan, Magenta, Yellow......476 12.4.17 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment ............477 12.4.18 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment reset ..........477 12.4.19 LD adjustment-LD delay adjust..............478 12.4.20 LD adjustment-LD lightness balance adjust..........479 12.4.21 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment ...............
Page 42 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care ............522 12.7.11 CS Remote Care Operation under Enhanced Security Mode ....522 12.8 System 1 ......................523 12.8.1 Marketing Area ..................523 12.8.2 Tel/Fax Number..................524 12.8.3 Serial Number...................
Page 43 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.9.19 User Paper Settings .................. 541 12.9.20 Coverage Rate Screen................542 12.9.21 JAM Code Display Setting ................ 542 12.9.22 BootUp Screen..................542 12.9.23 Install Data ....................543 12.9.24 Bluetooth Settings ..................544 12.10 Counter ......................544 12.10.1 Common procedure ..................
Page 44 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.12.7 Temp. & Humidity..................574 12.12.8 CCD Check....................575 12.12.9 Memory/HDD Adj.-Memory Check ............575 12.12.10 Memory/HDD Adj.-Compress / Decompression Check ......576 12.12.11 Memory/HDD Adj.-Memory Bus Check ............ 576 12.12.12 Memory/HDD Adj.-DSC Bus Check............576 12.12.13 Memory/HDD Adj.-HDD R/W Check............
Page 45 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Vertical Position ..........599 12.16.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Horizontal Position......... 600 12.16.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch edge detection ..........601 12.16.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-fold) ......... 602 12.16.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position (Z-fold) ......
Page 46 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.17.16 Forwarding Access Setting-FileName............618 12.17.17 Download....................618 ENHANCED SECURITY..................619 13.1 List of Enhanced Security................. 619 13.2 Starting/Exiting ....................619 13.2.1 Starting procedure ..................619 13.2.2 Exiting procedure..................619 13.3 Enhanced Security ................... 620 13.3.1 CE Password ....................
Page 47 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section..........641 16.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt ............641 16.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit ........642 16.1.3 Scanner position adjustment..............643 16.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit .......
Page 48 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.6 Misfeed at tray 4 feed section ..............681 17.3.7 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section ........682 17.3.8 Misfeed at tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section......682 17.3.9 LCT feed section..................683 17.3.10 LCT transport section ................
Page 49 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.43 Code: 72-50 ....................699 17.3.44 Code: 72-51 ....................699 17.3.45 Code: 72-60 ....................700 17.3.46 Code: 72-61 ....................700 17.3.47 Code: 72-62 ....................700 17.3.48 Code: 72-64 ....................701 17.3.49 Code: 72-81 ....................701 17.3.50 Code: 72-84 ....................
Page 50 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.1 Display procedure..................... 715 19.2 Trouble resetting procedure................715 19.2.1 Trouble resetting procedure by Trouble Reset key........715 19.3 Trouble isolation function .................. 716 19.4 List........................716 19.5 Solution ......................759 19.5.1 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn ...... 759 19.5.2 C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing .
Page 51 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.33 C1134: Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction ........776 19.5.34 C1135: Punch motor drive malfunction ............. 776 19.5.35 C1136: Punch switchover motor drive malfunction ........777 19.5.36 C1140: Side-staple rear adjust drive motor malfunction ......777 19.5.37 C1141: Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction .........
Page 52 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.70 C2204: Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn......... 794 19.5.71 C2253: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn........... 795 19.5.72 C2254: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing ...... 795 19.5.73 C2255: Color developing motor’s failure to turn........795 19.5.74 C2256: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing ....
Page 53 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.107 C2A22: Toner cartridge/M new release failure .......... 804 19.5.108 C2A23: Toner cartridge/Y new release failure .......... 804 19.5.109 C2A24: Toner cartridge/K new release failure .......... 804 19.5.110 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure ............. 805 19.5.111 C3102: Fusing roller failure to turn............
Page 54 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.142 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn.......... 816 19.5.143 C5306: IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn.......... 816 19.5.144 C5351: Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn ......817 19.5.145 C5354: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn ......... 817 19.5.146 C5356: Cooling fan motor’s failure to turn..........
Page 55 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.179 CC158: Finisher ROM error (ZU) .............. 828 19.5.180 CC159: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1) ........829 19.5.181 CC15A: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2)........829 19.5.182 CC15B: Finisher ROM error (SD) ............. 829 19.5.183 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) ............
Page 56 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.215 CD252: No relay circuit boards for IC-412 mounting at IC-412 mount setting ........................836 19.5.216 CD261: USB host board failure..............836 19.5.217 CD271: i-Option activated and additional memory not installed ....837 19.5.218 CD272: i-Option activated and additional memory and HDD not installed 837 19.5.219 CD401: NACK command incorrect ............
Page 57 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.2 How to identify problematic part ............... 859 22.2.1 Initial check items..................859 22.3 Solution......................862 22.3.1 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in sub scan direction ..................862 22.3.2 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in main scan direction ...................
Page 58 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.31 Printer 4-color: low image density ............895 22.3.32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction ............ 896 22.3.33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration ........897 22.3.34 Printer 4-color: void areas, white spots............. 898 22.3.35 Printer 4-color: colored spots..............899 22.3.36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance, offset ........
Page 59 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.12 Fusing/paper exit section ................931 24.2 DF-618/SP-501....................932 24.3 LU-301 (Option) ....................934 24.4 LU-204 (Option) ....................935 24.5 JS-504 (Option) ....................936 24.6 JS-603 (Option) ....................937 24.7 ZU-606 (Option)....................938 24.8 OT-503 (Option) ....................940 24.9 FS-526 (Option) ....................
Page 60 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 27.2 DF-618 ......................974 27.2.1 1-sided mode .................... 974 27.2.2 2-sided mode .................... 976 27.3 LU-204......................978 27.4 FS-526/SD-508 ....................979 27.4.1 Straight paper exit mode................979 27.4.2 2 flat stitching staples mode ..............981 27.4.3 Saddle stitching mode ................
Page 61: Outline
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OUTLINE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION d-Color MF651/MF551 1/2 System front view [15] [16] [17] [18] [14] [10] [11] [13] [12] A0P0F1E503DB d-Color MF651/MF551 Mount kit MK-715 *2 Authentication unit: Biometric type [10] Large capacity unit...
Page 62 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2/2 System rear view [10] [11] A0P0F1C502DB d-Color MF651/MF551 Mount kit MK-720 Stamp unit SP-501 Key counter kit KIT-1 Fax kit FK-502 Key counter kit KIT-CF *2 Image controller IC-412 [10]...
Page 63: D-Color Mf451
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION d-Color MF451 1/2 System front view [14] [15] [16] [17] [13] [10] [11] [12] A0P0F1C506DA d-Color MF451 Local interface kit EK-605 *1 Authentication unit: Biometric type Mount kit MK-715 *2 AU-101 [10] Large capacity unit LU-301...
Page 64 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2/2 System rear view [10] [11] A0P0F1C502DB d-Color MF451 Mount kit MK-720 Stamp unit SP-501 Key counter kit KIT-1 Fax kit FK-502 Key counter kit KIT-CF *1 Image controller IC-412 [10] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2 /105 *2...
Page 65: Product Specifications
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Type Type Combination scanner and printer console type Copying system Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Printing process Laser electrostatic printing system PC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability) Scanning density Main scan direction: 600 dpi, Sub scan direction: 600 dpi Exposure lamp...
Page 66: Functions
4.3 sec. or less (Black print) 6.0 sec. or less (Color print) d-Color MF451 4.8 sec. or less (Black print) 6.0 sec. or less (Color print) d-Color MF651: 310.00 mm/s Processing speed Plain paper black d-Color MF551: 264.00 mm/s d-Color MF451: 216.00 mm/s d-Color MF651: 240.00 mm/s...
Page 67 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS d-Color MF651: 1-sided: 65 copies/min, Copying speed for Black multi-copy cycle 2-sided: 65 copies/min (A4 or 8 x 11, plain x 11: 64 copies/min) paper, tray 1) d-Color MF551: 1-sided: 55 copies/min,...
Page 68: Paper
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Paper Paper source (maximum tray capacity) Type Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray Plain paper ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ (64 to 90 g/m / 17 (500 sheets) (500 sheets) (150 sheets) (1500 sheets)
Page 69: Materials
30,000 prints TN613C Toner cartridge/M 30,000 prints TN613M Toner cartridge/Y 30,000 prints TN613Y Toner cartridge/K 45,000 prints TN613K d-Color MF651 Imaging unit/C 135,000 prints IU612C d-Color MF551 120,000 prints d-Color MF651 Imaging unit/M 135,000 prints IU612M d-Color MF551 120,000 prints...
Page 70: Print Volume
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Print volume • d-Color MF651 Average Color print 5,500 prints/month Black print 16,400 prints/month Maximum Color print 63,000 prints/month Black print 187,000 prints/month Average Color print 7,400 prints/month Black print 22,200 prints/month...
Page 71: Machine Specifications
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Machine specifications • d-Color MF651 Power requirements Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V Current: 100 V 15 A + 7A 110 V 15 A + 7A 120 V...
Page 72: Operating Environment
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 *3: Space requirements are the values when the finisher tray extension, paper trays and LCU are pulled out, and the ADF is open. • d-Color MF451 Power requirements Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V Current: 100 V 15 A...
Page 73: Print Functions
Supported computer IBM PC/AT compatible machine, Macintosh (PowerPC/Intel processor : Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5 for Intel processor) PCL OLIVETTI Printer driver Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later) driver (PCL driver) Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later)
Page 74 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 PostScript OLIVETTI Printer driver Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later) driver (PS driver) Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later) Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later) Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Page 75: Scan Functions
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Printer driver Fax driver Windows NT Workstation Version 4.0 (SP6 or later) Windows NT Server Version 4.0 (SP6 or later) Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later) Windows 2000 Server (SP3 or later) Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later) Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later) Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Page 76 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Supported Windows Windows NT4.0 Server/Workstation operating Windows 2000 Server/Professional systems Windows XP Home/Professional Windows Server 2003 each edition Windows Vista each edition Windows Server 2008 DFS function is supported only in the environment that structured with the following Windows server operating systems.
Page 77: Maintenance
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS MAINTENANCE PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Concept of periodical maintenance • Cleaning/replacement cycle for each maintenance item of main body/options can be evaluated with the total counter value or each life counter/fixed parts counter value of [Service mode] [Counter] [Life].
Page 78: Automatic Document Feeder (Adf)
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Periodical maintenance 3 (life counter; every 300,000 counts) Lubri- Descrip- Section Description/part name Clean Check Replace cation tions ● Manual bypass Pick-up roller tray ● Feed roller Tray 1 Separation roller assy ●...
Page 79: Lu-204/301
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS B. Periodical maintenance 2 (life counter; every 200,000 counts) Lubri- Descrip- Section Description/part name Clean Check Replace cation tions ● Paper feed Pick-up roller section ● Feed roller ● Separation roller *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.
Page 80: Fs-526
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3.1.5 FS-526 A. Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts) Lubri- Descrip- Section Description/part name Clean Check Replace cation tions Overall Paper feed and image con- ● ditions ● ●...
Page 81: Pk-516
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS 3.1.7 PK-516 A. Periodical maintenance 1 (total counter; every 100,000 counts) Lubri- Descrip- Section Description/part name Clean Check Replace cation tions Overall Paper feed and image con- ● ditions ● ●...
Page 82: Fs-527
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Periodical maintenance 3 (fixed parts counter; every 200,000 counts) Lubri- Descrip- Section Description/part name Clean Check Replace cation tions ● Pick-up roller/Up Paper feed ● section Pick-up roller/Lw D. Periodical maintenance 4 (fixed parts counter; every 600,000 counts) Lubri- Descrip- Section...
Page 83: Periodical Replacement Parts List
• Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, standard mode and low power mode OFF. (Consumables which adopt field standard yield are excluded.) Color d-Color MF651 * Standard mode 5 pages per job 7 pages per job...
Page 84 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Descrip Ref. Classification Parts name Parts No. Replacing cycle tions page MF651: 135,000 *2 B0822 Processing Imaging unit/ Y P.33 section Imaging unit/ M B0823 MF551/MF451: Imaging unit/ C B0824 120,000 *2 Drum unit/ K B0826...
Page 85: Periodical Cleaning Parts List
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Descrip Ref. Classification Parts name Parts No. Replacing cycle tions Page AVGR09840K PI-505 Feed roller /Up 100,000 *4 AVGR09840K Feed roller /Lw 100,000 *4 AVGR09862S Separation roller /Up 100,000 *4 AVGR09862S Separation roller /Lw 100,000 *4...
Page 86 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3.3.2 Option Descrip- Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Ref.Page tions ZU-606 Punch edge 100,000 *1 Entrance guide plate 100,000 *1 Conveyance guide plate 100,000 *1 Registration roller 100,000 *1 Conveyance roller 100,000 *1 Exit guide plate...
Page 87: Cms Corresponding Parts
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS CMS corresponding parts 3.4.1 CMS corresponding parts • “CMS” stands for “customer maintenance support,” and this is applicable when the user wants to change parts by himself. 3.4.2 CMS corresponding parts list Section Corresponding parts Cycle...
Page 88: Concept Of Parts Life
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Concept of parts life 3.5.1 Life value of consumables and parts • The life counter value of each consumables and parts is available from [Service Mode] [Counter] [Life]. • Life specification value means an actual life terminated when prints are made under the conditions as defined in the next section, “Conditions for life specifications values.”...
Page 89: Conditions For Life Specifications Values
(see the table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user. Item Description Job type d-Color MF651 Black : Making 7 copies per job Color...
Page 90: Control Causing Inhibited Printing For One Part When An Inhibited-Printing Event Occurs In Another Part
3. PERIODICAL MIANTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3.5.3 Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part • In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts, make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached, and replace those parts at the same time.
Page 91: Periodical Maintenance Procedure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. Housing section 4.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Ozone filter: Every 285,000 counts B.
Page 92: Write Section
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Write section 4.2.1 Cleaning of the PH window Y/M/C/K A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • PH window Y,M,C,K: when toner cartridge is replaced B. Procedure 1. Open the lower front door. 2.
Page 93: Imaging Unit Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Imaging unit section 4.3.1 Replacing the imaging unit/Y,M,C A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Imaging unit/Y,M,C: Every 120,000 counts B. Removal procedure 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Remove the waste toner box. See P.51 3.
Page 94 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Remove the imaging unit [2] from the black protective bag [1]. A0P0F2C508DA 4. Remove the packing material and securing material. A0P0F2C509DA 5. Tilt the imaging unit to the direction , and lightly shake it twice ( ).
Page 95 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 7. Insert the new imaging unit into the machine, and close the securing lever [1] for the imaging unit. A0P0F2C512DA 8. Install the waste toner box [1], and close the lower front door. A0P0F2C513DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 96: Replacing The Drum Unit/K
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4.3.2 Replacing the drum unit/K A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Drum unit/K: Every 285,000 counts B. Removal procedure NOTE • In this procedure, the state in which the drum unit/K and the developing unit/K are assembled is called “imaging unit/K.”...
Page 97 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 5. Remove the new drum unit/K from the black protective bag. 6. Remove caps [1] at the front and the back of the drum unit/K. A0P0F2C525DA 7. Put the drum unit/K [1] on the devel- oping unit/K.
Page 98 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Remove the protective sheet [1] for the PC drum. A0P0F2C528DA 9. Secure the drum unit/K [1] to the developing unit/K with the two levers [2]. NOTE • Push the front and back levers in the direction of the arrow at a time to secure the drum unit/K.
Page 99 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 10. Insert the imaging unit/K [1] into the machine, and tighten the shoulder screw [2] to secure the drum unit/K. A0P0F2C529DA 11. Remount the waste toner box [1], and close the lower front door. A0P0F2C513DA 12.
Page 100: Charging Section
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Charging section 4.4.1 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire/Y,M,C A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Electrostatic charger wire/Y,M,C: Every 100,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool [1] as far as possible.
Page 101 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the toner supply duct [2]. A0P0F2C557DA 5. Open the package [1] of the new developing unit/K from the part shown on the left. A0P0F2C558DA 6.
Page 102 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. Place the new developing unit/K upside down together with its pack- age. 10. Open the package [1] of the new developing unit/K from the part shown on the left, and take out the developing unit/K.
Page 103 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 13. Remove the protective sheet [1]. A0P0F2C548DA 14. While aligning part A of the develop- ing unit/K with the screw hole on the rail, pass part B of the developing unit/K under the rail.
Page 104: Toner Supply Section
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. Fix the developing unit/K to the rail using the shoulder screw [1]. A0P0F2C550DA 17. Remount the drum unit/K. See P.36 Toner supply section 4.6.1 Replacing the toner cartridge NOTE •...
Page 105 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE C. Reinstall procedure 1. Remove the new toner cartridge [1] from its packaging, and then shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times. A0P0F2C502DA 2. Remove the protective tape [1]. A0P0F2C503DA 3.
Page 106: 1St Transfer Section
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 1st transfer section 4.7.1 Replacing the transfer belt unit A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Transfer belt unit: Every 570,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Remove the screw [1] and the upper right door stopper.
Page 107 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 5. Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt. NOTE • Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt.
Page 108 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. Install the rail [1] on the main body and secure it with the shoulder screw [2]. NOTE • Make sure that the protrusion (at two places) on the rail is inserted into the dowel holes [3] (at two places) on the main body.
Page 109 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE NOTE • When removing/reinstalling the transfer belt unit, be sure not to allow the contact [1] to hit the screw [2] of the transfer belt unit lock. A00JF2C609DA 10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
Page 110: 2Nd Transfer/Separation Section
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2nd transfer/separation section 4.8.1 Replacing the transfer roller unit A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Transfer roller unit: Every 570,000 counts B. Removal procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Unlock the lock levers [1] of the transfer roller unit (at two places).
Page 111: Toner Collection Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Toner collection section 4.9.1 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Area around the waste toner collecting port: Every 100,000 counts B. Procedure 1.
Page 112 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Mount the enclosed cap [2] included in the new waste toner box to the waste toner box [1] that has been removed at the step 2. A00JF2C507DA 4. Place the waste toner box [1] with the cap attached into the plastic bag [2].
Page 113: 4.10 Paper Feed Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.10 Paper feed section 4.10.1 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts • Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts B.
Page 114: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller installa- tion plate assy [2]. A0P0F2C563DA 7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 feed roller cover [2]. A00JF2C010DA 8.
Page 115 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 10. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and two bearings [3], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4]. A0P0F2C565DA 11. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 1 feed roller [3].
Page 116: Replacing The Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4.10.2 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 1 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 1. 2. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover. See P.92 3.
Page 117: Replacing The Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.10.3 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 2 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts • Tray 2 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts B.
Page 118 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller installa- tion plate assy [2]. A00JF2C020DA 9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 feed roller cover [2]. A00JF2C021DA 10.
Page 119 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 12. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and two bearings [3], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4]. A0P0F2C565DA 13. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 2 feed roller [3].
Page 120: Replacing The Tray 2 Separation Roller Assy
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4.10.4 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 2 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 2. 2. Open the lower right door. 3.
Page 121: Replacing The Tray 3 Feed Roller/Tray 3 Pick-Up Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.10.5 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 3 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts • Tray 3 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts B.
Page 122: Replacing The Tray 3 Separation Roller
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 pick-up roller [2]. A00JF2C027DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 7. Remove the tray 3 separation roller. See P.62 8.
Page 123 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 3. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from two edge covers [2]. NOTE • When reinstalling the harness, route the harness so that the har- ness tie [3] is positioned as shown in the illustration on the left.
Page 124: Replacing The Tray 4 Feed Roller/Tray 4 Pick-Up Roller
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4.10.7 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 4 feed roller: Every 300,000 counts • Tray 4 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts B.
Page 125: Replacing The Tray 4 Separation Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 4 pick-up roller [2]. A00JF2C027DA 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 6. Remove the tray 4 separation roller. See P.65 7.
Page 126 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Disconnect three connectors [1], and remove the harness from three edge covers [2]. A00JF2C035DA 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 4 paper feed unit [2]. A00JF2C036DA 5.
Page 127: Replacing The Manual Bypass Tray Feed Roller/Manual Bypass Tray Pick-Up Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.10.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 300,000 counts • Manual bypass tray pick-up roller: Every 300,000 counts B.
Page 128 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the manual bypass tray feed roller [3]. A00JF2C041DA 7. Remove three C-rings [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the manual bypass tray pick-up roller [3].
Page 129: Replacing The Manual Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.10.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 300,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. 2.
Page 130: 4.11 Vertical Conveyance Section
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4.11 Vertical conveyance section 4.11.1 Cleaning of the paper dust remover A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Paper dust remover: Every 100,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2.
Page 131: 4.12 Registration Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.12 Registration section 4.12.1 Cleaning of the timing roller A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Timing roller: Every 100,000 counts B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the timing roller [1] clean of dirt.
Page 132 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Hold the position as shown in the left and remove the fusing unit [1]. NOTE • When removing the fusing unit, grip it with both hands to avoid letting the fusing unit fall down.
Page 133: Cleaning Of The Ih Coil Unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4.13.2 Cleaning of the IH coil unit A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • IH coil unit: Every 570,000 counts (When the fusing unit is replaced) B. Procedure 1. Remove the fusing unit. See P.71 2.
Page 134: Other Maintenance Items
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.
Page 135: Disassembly/Reassembly Parts List
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Disassembly/reassembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Exterior parts Upper front door P.79 Lower front door P.80 Upper front cover /1 P.80 Upper front cover /2 P.81 Right front cover P.81 Lower front cover P.82...
Page 136 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Section Part name Ref. page Units PH unit P.97 Duplex unit P.99 Manual bypass tray unit P.100 CCD unit P.101 Original glass moving unit P.103 Glass step sheet P.105 Exposure unit P.107 Hard disk P.109...
Page 137 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Section Part name Ref. page Motors Color PC drum motor (M16) P.166 Color developing motor (M17) P.167 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) P.167 Registration motor (M2) P.168 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) P.170 Fusing motor (M30) P.171...
Page 138: Cleaning Parts List
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Cleaning parts list Section Part name Ref. page Processing section Transfer belt unit P.215 Tray 1 Tray 1 feed roller P.215 Tray 1 pick-up roller P.215 Tray 1 separation roller P.216 Tray 1 transport roller P.216...
Page 139: Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Disassembly/reassembly procedure 5.5.1 Upper front door 1. Open the upper front door. 2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2]. A00JF2C061DA 3. Remove the C-clip [1]. A00JF2C062DA 4. Slide the upper front door [1] to the left to remove it.
Page 140: Lower Front Door
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.2 Lower front door 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the stopper [2]. A0P0F2C007DA 3. Remove the C-clip [1]. 4. Slide the lower front door [2] to the left to remove it.
Page 141: Upper Front Cover /2
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.4 Upper front cover /2 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the upper front cover /2 [2]. A0P0F2C010DA 2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.5 Right front cover 1.
Page 142: Lower Front Cover
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.6 Lower front cover 1. Slide out the tray 1/2. 2. Remove the front right cover. See P.93 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the lower front cover [2]. NOTE •...
Page 143: Upper Left Cover
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.7 Upper left cover 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the upper left cover [2]. A0P0F2C012DA 3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.8 Lower left cover 1.
Page 144: Rear Left Cover
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.9 Rear left cover 1. Remove the upper left cover. See P.83 2. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.92 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2]. A0P0F2C589DA 4.
Page 145: Scanner Rear Cover
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.11 Scanner rear cover 1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the scanner rear cover [2]. A0P0F2C013DA 2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.12 Scanner right cover 1. Remove the scanner rear cover. See P.85 2.
Page 146: Scanner Upper Rear Cover/1
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.13 Scanner upper rear cover/1 1. Remove the ADF. See P.19 of the DF-618/SP-501 service manual. 2. Remove the scanner right cover. See P.85 3. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and three screws [2], and remove the scanner upper rear cover/1 [3].
Page 147: Scanner Left Cover
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.15 Scanner left cover 1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2]. A0P0F2C017DA 2. Remove four screws [1], and remove the scanner left cover [2]. A0P0F2C018DA 3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.16 Scanner upper front cover 1.
Page 148: Scanner Front Cover
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.17 Scanner front cover 1. Remove the scanner upper front cover. See P.87 2. Remove the upper front cover /1 and the upper front cover /2. See P.80 3. Remove the scanner left cover. See P.87 4.
Page 149: Original Glass
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the USB interface cover [2]. A0P0F2C023DA 4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.19 Original glass 1. Remove the scanner right cover. See P.85 2.
Page 150: Interface Cover/1
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.20 Interface cover/1 1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the interface cover/1 [2]. A0P0F2C026DA 2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.21 Interface cover/2 1. Open the interface cover/2. 2.
Page 151: Rear Right Cover/1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.22 Rear right cover/1 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Remove the ozone filter. See P.31 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the rear right cover/1 [2]. A0P0F2C028DA 4.
Page 152: Manual Bypass Tray Rear Cover
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.24 Manual bypass tray rear cover 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Manual bypass tray rear cover [2]. A0P0F2C031DA 2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.25 Upper rear cover/1 1.
Page 153: Lower Rear Cover
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.27 Lower rear cover 1. Remove six screws [1], and remove the lower rear cover [2]. A0P0F2C034DA 2. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.28 Front right cover 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. 2.
Page 154: Exit Tray (Option: Ot-503)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the control panel assy [2]. A0P0F2C037DA 4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.30 Exit tray (option: OT-503) 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2].
Page 155 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Disconnect the connector [2] of the fan unit [1]. A0P0F2C552DA 4. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2], and remove the fan unit [3]. A00JF2C520DA 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 156: Tray 1/2
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.31 Tray 1/2 NOTE • Tray 1 and 2 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 1. 1. Slide out the tray. 2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray [2].
Page 157: Ph Unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.33 PH unit CAUTION • Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is ON. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness. • Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness.
Page 158 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Unplug two flat cables [1] and removed if from the cable guide [2]. 6. Remove the screw [3] to remove the ground terminal [4]. NOTE • Handle the flat cables carefully. Remove them from the cable guide with care while making it parallel to the guide.
Page 159: Duplex Unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 11. Select [Skew adjustment] after selecting [Service Mode] [Machine] [Skew adjustment], and input the adjustment value that is put on the side of the replaced PH unit. See P.477 A0P0F2C044DA 12.
Page 160: Manual Bypass Tray Unit
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Open the upper right door, and remove the tab [1]. A00JF2C107DA 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the duplex unit [2]. A0P0F2C045DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.35 Manual bypass tray unit 1.
Page 161: Ccd Unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray rear cover [2]. A00JF2C110DA 4. Open the manual bypass tray. 5. Remove the E-ring [1]. 6. Remove the hinge shaft [2] from below and remove the manual bypass tray [3].
Page 162 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Disconnect two connectors [1]. 4. Remove four screws [2], and remove the CCD unit [3]. A0P0F2C046DA B. Reinstall procedure 1. Set the CCD unit to the mounting position at the center of the scale, and fix it with four screws.
Page 163: Original Glass Moving Unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.37 Original glass moving unit A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the scanner left cover. See P.87 2. Remove the scanner front cover. See P.88 3. Remove the original glass. See P.89 4.
Page 164 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Remove four screws [1], and remove the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the spacer [3] mounted on each screw. • Write down the type and numbers of the spacer [3].
Page 165: Glass Step Sheet
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 4. Tighten four screws [1] fully. A0P0F2C053DA 5. Follow the removing procedures in the opposite steps. 6. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] [ADF] [Read Pos Adj] See P.593 5.5.38 Glass step sheet A.
Page 166 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Reinstall procedure 1. Mount the glass step sheet [1] to the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Set the sheet [3] under the cover of the original glass moving unit [4]. •...
Page 167: Exposure Unit
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.39 Exposure unit A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure unit [2]. A0P0F2C054DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the expo- sure unit.
Page 168 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 2. Tighten the exposure unit [2] with the two screws [1] temporarily. A0P0F2C054DA 3. Move the exposure unit [1] and the mirror unit to the end of the right. A0P0F2C056DA 4.
Page 169: Hard Disk
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.40 Hard disk 1. Remove the upper rear cover/1. See P.92 2. Remove six screws [1], and remove the cover [2]. A0P0F2C058DA 3. Remove three screws [1] of the hard disk drive assy.
Page 170 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A0P0F2C061DA 6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the hard disk drive [2]. 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
Page 171: Ih Coil (Fh1)
The terminal leakage may cause fire. A00JF2C460DA A: The harness with the longest green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF551) is installed with the M4 screw. B: The harness with green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF551) is installed with the M4 screw.
Page 172 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness. A0P0F2C141DA 5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the exit tray right cover [2]. A0P0F2C063DA 6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit tray front cover [2].
Page 173 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 8. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the har- ness guide [2]. A0P0F2C066DA 9. Remove the screw [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A0P0F2C067DA 10. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1].
Page 174 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2]. A0P0F2C069DA 12. Remove the fixture of the IH coil [1] as shown in the left illustration. A0P0F2C070DA 13. Removing the harness [1], remove the IH coil [2].
Page 175: Intermediate Transport Roller Assy
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.42 Intermediate transport roller assy 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. 2. Remove the rear right cover /2 and interface cover /2. See P.91 3. Open the lower right door. 4.
Page 176: Main Drive Unit
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.43 Main drive unit 1. Remove the fusing unit. See P.71 2. Remove the transfer belt motor. See P.166 3. Remove the color PC drum motor. See P.166 4. Remove the color developing motor. See P.167 5.
Page 177 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 12. Remove the harness from eight wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2], and disconnect the connector [3]. A00JF2C130DA 13. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the gear [2]. A00JF2C131DA 14.
Page 178: Lcc Drive Unit
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the main drive unit [2]. A00JF2C134DA 17. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. NOTE • When the color PC drum motor is removed to take out the main drive unit, make sure to adjust the positioning of the PC drive gear when mounting the color PC drum motor.
Page 179 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5. Remove two E-rings [1], the C-clip [2], the bearing [3] and the gear [4]. A00JF2C136DA 6. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. A0P0F2C075DA 7.
Page 180 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. Disconnect three connectors [1]. A0P0F2C078DA 10. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2]. A0P0F2C079DA 11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2]. A0P0F2C080DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 181 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 12. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2]. A0P0F2C081DA 13. Remove two screws [1], and remove the cover [2]. A0P0F2C082DA 14. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].
Page 182 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. Disconnect the connector [1]. 17. Remove seven screws [2], and remove the power supply code unit [3]. A0P0F2C085DA 18. Remove seven screws [1] of the LCC drive unit. A0P0F2C086DA 19.
Page 183: Scanner Chassis
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.45 Scanner chassis 1. Remove the scanner left cover. See P.87 2. Remove the scanner front cover. See P.88 3. Remove the scanner right cover. See P.85 4. Remove the scanner rear cover. See P.85 5.
Page 184 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2]. A0P0F2C090DA 11. Remove the cable holder [1]. A0P0F2C091DA 12. Disconnect two connectors [1] and the USB connector [2]. 13. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [3].
Page 185: Scanner Relay Board (Reyb/Scan)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 14. Remove nine screws [1], and remove scanner chassis [2]. A0P0F2C093DA 15. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.46 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) 1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover/1. See P.86 2.
Page 186: Original Glass Position Control Board (Ogpcb)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Remove five screws [1], and remove the scanner relay board [2]. A0P0F2C095DA 4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.47 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) 1. Remove the scanner rear cover. See P.85 2.
Page 187: Inverter Board (Invb)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.48 Inverter board (INVB) 1. Remove the scanner upper rear cover/1. See P.92 2. Disconnect nine connectors [1]. 3. Remove the harnesses from four wire saddles [2], two edge covers [3] and the harness holder [4].
Page 188: Ph Relay Board (Reyb/Ph)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.49 PH relay board (REYB/PH) 1. Remove the upper left cover. See P.83 2. Remove the lower left cover. See P.83 3. Disconnect the connector [1]. A0P0F2C039DA 4. Remove twelve screws [1], and remove the PH unit protective shield [2].
Page 189: Paper Feed/Transport Drive Board (Pftdb)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 6. Remove five screws [1], and remove the PH relay board [2]. A0P0F2C102DA 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.50 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) 1. Remove the lower rear cover. See P.93 2.
Page 190: Dc Power Supply (Dcpu)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove two wire saddles [1]. 7. Remove six screws [2], and remove the paper feed/transport drive board [3]. A0P0F2C104DA 8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.51 DC power supply (DCPU) 1.
Page 191 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 7. Remove thirteen screws [1], and remove the DC power supply protec- tive shield/1 [2]. A0P0F2C105DA 8. Disconnect the connector [1] of the power supply cooling fan motor. 9. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].
Page 192 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. A0P0F2C109DA 13. Remove all the connectors on the DC power supply [1]. A0P0F2C110DA 14. Remove five screws [1]. A0P0F2C111DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 193: Relay Drive Board (Redb)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 15. Clearing the harness, hold up the DC power supply [1] to remove it. A0P0F2C112DA 16. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.52 Relay drive board (REDB) 1. Remove the DC power supply. See P.130 2.
Page 194: Printer Control Board (Prcb)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.53 Printer control board (PRCB) 1. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2. See P.92 2. Remove fifteen screws [1], and remove the printer control board pro- tective shield [2].
Page 195: How To Open Pwb Box/1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the printer control board [2]. 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. NOTE • When the printer control board is to be replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.
Page 196: Pci Board (Pcib)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.55 PCI board (PCIB) 1. Remove the rear right cover /1. See P.91 2. Remove six screws [1], and remove the cover [2]. A0P0F2C058DA 3. Slide out the PCI board assy [1]. A0P0F2C121DA 4.
Page 197: Mfp Board (Mfpb)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.56 MFP board (MFPB) 1. Remove the hard disk drive assy. See P.109 2. Remove the PCI board assy. See P.136 3. Remove eleven screws [1], and remove the MFP board protective shield [2].
Page 198 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove six screws [1] of the MFP control board cooling fan motor assy. A0P0F2C126DA 7. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the MFP control board cool- ing fan motor assy [2]. A0P0F2C127DA 8.
Page 199 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 10. Remove six bolts [1] and six screws [2] [3] [2], and remove the port bracket [3]. A0P0F2C129DA 11. Disconnect six connectors [1] and two flat cables [2]. A0P0F2C130DA 12. Remove ten screws [1], and remove the MFP board [2].
Page 200: How To Open Pwb Box/2
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.57 How to open PWB box/2 1. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.92 2. Remove the rear right cover /1. See P.91 3. Disconnect two connectors [1] and USB connector [2].
Page 201: Service Eeprom Board (Sv Erb)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Remove five screws [1], and remove two harness guides [2]. A00JF2C207DA 4. Remove five screws [1] and four tap- ping screws [2], and remove the high voltage unit/2 [3]. A00JF2C208DA 5.
Page 202 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 NOTE After replacing the service EEPROM board, all parts shown below are required to be replaced with new ones. • Imaging unit Y/M/C/K • Toner cartridge Y/M/C/K • Waste toner box •...
Page 203 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS NOTE • After replacing the service EEPROM board, be sure to make the above listed adjustments before the first warm-up is made. 6. Turn OFF the main power switch and sub power switch. 7.
Page 204: High Voltage Unit/1 (Hv1)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.60 High voltage unit/1 (HV1) 1. Remove the upper rear cove /1, upper rear cover /2 and lower rear cover. See P.92 2. Remove the rear right cover/1, rear right cover/2, interface cover/1 and interface cover/ See P.90 3.
Page 205 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 8. Disconnect eight connectors [1]. A0P0F2C137DA 9. Remove four screws [1], and remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy [2]. A0P0F2C138DA 10. Remove five cable holders [1] and clear the flat cables [2]. A00JF2C215DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 206 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 11. Remove four screws [1] and take out the reinforcing plate [2]. A00JF2C216DA 12. Disconnect four connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1]. A00JF2C217DA 13. Disconnect four connectors [1]. NOTE •...
Page 207 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 14. Remove four screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A00JF2C219DA 15. Disconnect four connectors [1]. A00JF2C246DA 16. Remove three screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A00JF2C220DA 17.
Page 208 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. Remove nine screws [1]. A00JF2C222DA 19. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the high voltage unit/1 [2]. A00JF2C223DA 20. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 209: Ih Power Supply (Ihpu)
The terminal leakage may cause fire. A00JF2C460DA A: The harness with the longest green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF5521) is installed with the M4 screw. B: The harness with green color (d-Color MF651) or blue color (d-Color MF551) is installed with the M4 screw.
Page 210 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Disconnect the connector [1]. A0P0F2C139DA 5. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the IH power supply protective shield [2]. A0P0F2C140DA 6. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness. A0P0F2C141DA 7.
Page 211: Paper Size Detect Board/1 (Psdtb/1)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 8. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the IH power supply [2]. A0P0F2C143DA 9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.62 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) 1. Remove the tray1 and tray2. See P.96 2.
Page 212: Paper Size Detect Board/2 (Psdtb/2)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size detect board/1 [2]. A00JF2C243DA 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.63 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) 1. Remove the tray1 and tray 2. See P.96 2.
Page 213: Adu Transport Motor/1 (M31)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 6. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size detect board/2 [2]. A00JF2C243DA 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.64 ADU transport motor/1 (M31) 1. Remove the duplex unit. See P.99 2.
Page 214: Adu Transport Motor/2 (M32)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/1 [2]. A00JF2C249DA 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.65 ADU transport motor/2 (M32) 1. Remove the duplex unit. See P.99 2.
Page 215: Bypass Tray Up Down Motor (M28) / Bypass Paper Feed Motor (M27)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the ADU transport motor/2 [2]. A00JF2C252DA 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.66 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27) 1.
Page 216 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Disconnect two connectors [1]. A00JF2C257DA NOTE <1> • When reinstalling the harness and connectors which were removed in step 4, route the harnesses follow- ing the procedure shown in the illustrations on the left.
Page 217 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C258DA 6. Remove six screws [1]. A00JF2C259DA 7. Pull the manual bypass tray drive assy [1] to the direction shown as the illustration to remove it.
Page 218 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Remove the screw [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the bypass tray up down motor [3]. A00JF2C261DA 9. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2]. 10.
Page 219: Scanner Motor (M201)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.67 Scanner motor (M201) A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the scanner rear cover. See P.85 2. Remove the scanner upper rear cover /1. See P.86 3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the harnesses from two wire sad- dles [2].
Page 220 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove three screws [2]. A0P 0 F2C1 4 7 D A 8. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and remove the scanner motor assy [3].
Page 221: Original Glass Moving Motor (M202)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS B. Reinstall procedure 1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws [2]. A00JF3C538DA 2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the left and check that it is returned to the origi- nal position by the tension of the...
Page 222 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1] and four wire saddles [2]. A0P0F2C150DA 5. Disconnect the connector [1]. 6. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [2]. A0P0F2C151DA 7.
Page 223: Waste Toner Agitating Motor (M20)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass moving motor [2]. A0P0F2C154DA 10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.69 Waste toner agitating motor (M20) 1. Remove the PH relay board. See P.128 2.
Page 224: Transport Motor (M25)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove the wire saddle [1], connec- tor [2] and two screws [3], and take out the waste toner agitating motor [4]. A0P0F2C157DA 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.70 Transport motor (M25) 1.
Page 225: Vertical Transport Motor (M26)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.71 Vertical transport motor (M26) 1. Remove the lower rear cover. See P.93 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2]. A0P0F2C160DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor assy [2].
Page 226: Transfer Belt Motor (M1)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.72 Transfer belt motor (M1) 1. Open the PWB box/2. See P.140 2. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the transfer belt motor [3]. A00JF2C280DA 3.
Page 227: Color Developing Motor (M17)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.74 Color developing motor (M17) 1. Open the PWB box/2. See P.140 2. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the color developing motor [3]. A0P0F2C161DA 3.
Page 228: Registration Motor (M2)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor assy [1]. A00JF2C285DA 5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor [2]. A00JF2C286DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.76 Registration motor (M2) 1.
Page 229 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the harness from the wire saddle [2]. 4. Remove two screws [3] and take out the pressure welding alienation sen- sor assy [4]. A00JF2C287DA 5.
Page 230: Fusing Pressure Retraction Motor (M29)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the registration motor [2]. A00JF2C291DA 9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.77 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) 1. Remove the rear right cover/1. See P.91 2.
Page 231: Fusing Motor (M30)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.78 Fusing motor (M30) 1. Remove the scanner rear cover. See P.85 2. Open the PWB box/2. See P.140 3. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and remove the fusing motor [3].
Page 232 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the duct [2]. A0P0F2C165DA 5. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from the edge cover [2]. A0P0F2C166DA 6. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the con- nector [2].
Page 233 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 8. Remove five screws [1], and remove the fan motor assy /1 [2]. A0P0F2C169DA 9. Remove three screws [1], and remove the switchback motor assy [2]. A0P0F2C170DA 10. Remove two screws [1], and remove the switchback motor [2].
Page 234: Exit Motor (M4)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.80 Exit motor (M4) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See the steps 1 to 8 of fusing motor removing procedure. See P.171 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].
Page 235: K Pc Drum Motor (M18)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.81 K PC drum motor (M18) 1. Take out the reinforcing plate. See the steps 1 to 11 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.144 2. Open the upper right door. 3.
Page 236: K Developing Motor (M19)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.82 K developing motor (M19) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /2. See the steps 1 to 5 of K PC drum motor removing procedure. See P.175 2. Remove four screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and remove the K devel- oping motor [3].
Page 237: Tray2 Lift-Up Motor (M8)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray1 lift-up motor [2]. A00JF2C312DA 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.84 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8) 1. Remove the tray1 and tray 2. See P.96 2.
Page 238: Tray3 Lift-Up Motor (M23)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the tray 2 lift-up motor [2]. A00JF2C312DA 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.85 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) 1. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P.118 2.
Page 239: Tray1 Vertical Transport Motor (M5)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.87 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) 1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.144 2. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].
Page 240: Tray2 Vertical Transport Motor (M7)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.88 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) 1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.144 2. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P.118 3.
Page 241: Take-Up Motor (M22)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.89 Take-up motor (M22) 1. Slide out tray 1/2. 2. Remove the reinforcing plate. See the steps 1 to 11 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.144 3. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit. See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 1 feed roller replacement procedure.
Page 242: Charge Cleaning Motor/K (M15)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the take-up motor [2]. A00JF2C325DA 9. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.90 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) 1. Remove the drum unit/K. See P.36 2.
Page 243: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5. Remove the harnesses from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2]. 6. Disconnect two connectors [3]. A0P0F2C590DA 7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the charge cleaning motor/K assy.
Page 244: Cleaner Motor (M38)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the charge cleaning motor/K [2]. A0P0F2C594DA 10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.91 Cleaner motor (M38) 1. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See the steps 1 to 8 of switch back motor removing procedure.
Page 245 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5. Disconnect the connector [1]. 6. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [2]. A0P0F2C186DA 7. Remove four screws [1], and take out the fan motor assy/4 [2] as clearing the harness.
Page 246 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. Remove two screws [1], and remove the harness guide [2]. A0P0F2C190DA 11. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [1]. A0P0F2C191DA 12. Remove five screws [1] and four tap- ping screws [2], and remove the high voltage unit/2 [3].
Page 247 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 13. Remove four screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A00JF2C607DA 14. Close the PWB box/2 once and remove two screws [1] of the cleaner motor. A00JF2C342DA 15. Open the PWB box/2 again, remove two screws [1] and the connector [2], and take out the cleaner motor [3].
Page 248: 1St Image Transfer Pressure Retraction Motor (M21)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.92 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) 1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure. See P.184 2. Remove two screws [1] and the con- nector [2], and take out the 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor [3].
Page 249: Toner Cartridge Motor Y/M (M13)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the toner cartridge motor C/K [2]. A00JF2C346DA 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 5.5.94 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) 1. Remove the high voltage unit/2 Assy. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure.
Page 250: Toner Supply Motor/Y (M9), Toner Supply Motor/M (M10), Toner Supply Motor/C (M11), Toner Supply Motor/K (M12)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.95 Toner supply motor/Y (M9), toner supply motor/M (M10), toner supply motor/C (M11), toner supply motor/K (M12) 1. Remove the upper front door. See P.79 2. Remove the upper left cover. See P.83 3.
Page 251 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 8. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from four wire saddles [2]. A0P0F2C198DA 9. Remove the screw [1], and remove the hinge convex part [2]. A0P0F2C199DA 10. Remove three screws [1], and remove the toner cartridge inserting port cover/Y,M,C [2].
Page 252 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 11. Remove nine screws [1], and pull the front cover [2] forward slowly. NOTE • Use care not to mistake in the kind of the screws. A00JF2C353DA 12. Disconnect the connector [1]. A0P0F2C200DA 13.
Page 253: Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl1)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 15. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove four screws [2], then remove the toner hopper unit /Y [3]. [1] [2] A00JF2C359DA 16. Remove two screws [1] and discon- nect the connector [2], and remove the toner supply motor /Y [3].
Page 254: Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch 2 (Cl2)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch [2]. 4. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. NOTE • When mounting the tray 1 paper feed clutch, set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 1 paper feed clutch.
Page 255: Horizontal Transport Clutch (Cl3)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.98 Horizontal transport clutch (CL3) 1. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P.118 2. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the horizontal transport clutch [2]. 3. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
Page 256: Tray 4 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl7)
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.5.100 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) 1. Slide out the tray 4. 2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 4 [2] to the end. A00JF2C034DA 3. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1], and disconnect the con- nector [2].
Page 257: Idc Registration Sensor/F (Idcs/F), Idc Registration Sensor/R (Idcs/R)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.101 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F), IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R). 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Remove the image transfer entrance guide. See the steps 1 to 4 of image transfer belt unit removing procedure. See P.46 3.
Page 258 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Remove seven screws [1] and the spring [2], and remove the sensor cover [3]. A00JF2C368DA 7. Remove two screws [1], and discon- nect the connector [2], then remove the IDC registration sensor/F [3]. A00JF2C369DA 8.
Page 259: Scanner Drive Cables
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.5.102 Scanner drive cables A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the scanner chassis. See P.123 2. Remove the exposure unit. See P.107 3. Remove the scanner motor. See P.159 4. Remove the original glass moving unit. See P.103 5.
Page 260 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. Remove the bead side [1] of the scanner drive cables from the adjust- ment anchor. A0P0F2C204DA 10. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing [2]. A0P0F2C205DA 11. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner drive gear [2].
Page 261 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 13. Remove the shaft [1] and pulleys [2]. A0P0F2C207DA 14. Remove the screw [1] one each and take out the two pulleys [2] from the shaft. 15. Remove the scanner drive cables [3] from each pulley [2].
Page 262 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. reinstall procedure (1) Overall figure A00JF2C441DA (2) Winding of the scanner drive cables NOTE • The scanner drive cable differs in type between the front (silver) and the rear (black), which are colored differently.
Page 263 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in clockwise direction five times. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
Page 264 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in anticlockwise direction five times. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
Page 265 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 9. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the shaft [2], and fix them with one screw each [3]. NOTE • Set the pulley at the direction as shown in the illustration. •...
Page 266 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 <Front> 13. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley B [2], and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor [3]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley B.
Page 267 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 17. Put the scanner drive cable into the scanner frame hole [2] via the pulley D [1]. A00JF2C450DA 18. Hook the end of the spring [1] to the wire and the other end to the hook [2] on the scanner left frame.
Page 268 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley B [2] via the pulley A [1]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley B [2].
Page 269: Tray 3/4 Lift Wire
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 27. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] [Machine] [Scan Area] [Feed Direction Adjustment]] See P.474 28. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] [ADF] [Read Pos Adj] See P.593 5.5.103 Tray 3/4 lift wire NOTE •...
Page 270 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear cover [2], and take out the gear Assy [3]. A0P0F2C575DA 5. Remove the gear [1] and the bearing [2]. A0P0F2C577DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 271 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /2 (white) [4] from the shaft [3]. [1] [2] [4] A0P0F2C576DA 7.
Page 272 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. Remove the E-ring [1]. 10. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3], and then remove the wire /2 (white) [4]. 11. Pull out and remove the wire /2 (white) toward the rear side of the lift plate [5].
Page 273 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /3 (black) [4] from the shaft [3]. A0P0F2C581DA 15. Remove the E-ring [1]. 16.
Page 274 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /4 (white) [4] from the shaft [3]. A0P0F2C583DA 19. Remove the E-ring [1]. 20.
Page 275: Cleaning Procedure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol isopropyl alcohol. 5.6.1 Transfer belt unit 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. See P.46 2. Using a dried cleaning pad, wipe the transfer belt [1].
Page 276: Tray 1 Separation Roller
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C373DA 5.6.3 Tray 1 separation roller 1. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 1 separation roller assy replacement procedure.
Page 277: Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.6.5 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller 1. Open the lower right door. 2. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 2 separation roller assy replacement procedure. See P.60 3.
Page 278: Tray 2 Transport Roller
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.6.7 Tray 2 transport roller 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C378DA 5.6.8 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller 1.
Page 279: Tray 3 Separation Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C380DA 5.6.9 Tray 3 separation roller 1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 3 feed roller replacement procedure.
Page 280: Tray 4 Feed Roller/Tray 4 Pick-Up Roller
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 3 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C382DA 5.6.11 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller 1. Slide out the tray 4. 2.
Page 281: Tray 4 Separation Roller
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.6.12 Tray 4 separation roller 1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 4 feed roller replacement procedure. See P.64 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 4 separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
Page 282: Manual Bypass Tray Pick-Up Roller
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.6.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller 1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the manual bypass tray pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C388DA 5.6.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller 1.
Page 283: Original Glass
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 5.6.18 Original glass 1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the original glass [1] clean of dirt. A0P0F2C517DA 2. Open the ADF, and remove the cleaner [1] A0P0F2C518DA 3.
Page 284: Scanner Rails
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5.6.19 Scanner rails 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the scanner rails [1] clean of dirt. NOTE • Apply lubricant after cleaning. A00JF2C391DA 5.6.20 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd)
Page 285: Ccd Sensor
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS 3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the lens [1] clean of dirt. A0P0F2C210DA 5.6.22 CCD sensor 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective shield [2].
Page 286 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the CCD sensor cover [2]. A0P0F2C213DA 5. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the CCD sensor [1] clean of dirt. A0P0F2C214DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 287: Lubrication Procedure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Lubrication procedure 5.7.1 Fusing unit • When the fusing unit produces abnormal noise under operating conditions, lubricate the brush roller shaft and the sliding member of the bearings which can make the noise. 1.
Page 288: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
5. OTHER MAINTENANCE ITEMS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Apply the heat resistant conductive grease (SANKOL ECG-25) to the surface [1] where the brush roller shaft contacts the bearings. NOTE • Be sure to use heat-resistant conductive grease. •...
Page 289: Service Tool
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. SERVICE TOOL SERVICE TOOL Service material list Name Shape Material No. Remarks Isopropyl alcohol A00KF2C506DA Heat-resistant conductive SANKOL ECG-25 grease A00J PP00 ## grease A00JF2C613DA CE tool list Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks Original glass moving unit AVGR04761W...
Page 290 6. SERVICE TOOL Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Tool name Shape Quantity Parts No. Remarks AVGR06936D A3 Color chart A0P0F2C553DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 291: Firmware Rewriting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING FIRMWARE REWRITING Outline • There are two ways to update the firmware: One is by directly connecting with the main body using the USB memory device, and the other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW.
Page 292 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 3. Remove the screw [1]. 4. Loosen the screw [2], and lift up the cover [3] of the USB port. 5. Insert the USB memory device to the USB port [4] for service. A0P0F2C570DA NOTE •...
Page 293 DSC2 *1: d-Color MF651/MF551 only *2: d-Color MF451 only *3: In d-Color MF651/MF552, this is displayed only when the function enhanced version 1 or later firmware is installed. NOTE • Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is automatically updated after 30 seconds when the main power switch/sub power switch is turned •...
Page 294 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 NOTE • When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.
Page 295: Action When Data Transfer Fails
DSC board Only when the SC-507 is mounted Not used DSC2 *1: d-Color MF651/MF551 only *2: d-Color MF451 only *3: In d-Color MF651/MF551, this is displayed only when the function enhanced version 1 or later firmware is installed. Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 296: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw
7. FIRMWARE REWRITING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW 7.3.1 Outline • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating.
Page 297 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING 3. Touch [ON], and touch [END]. NOTE • Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this set- ting. • When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [Administrator Setting] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode]...
Page 298 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Forwarding access setting • To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. A00JF2E584DA 3.
Page 299: Firmware Rewriting From The Control Panel
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING 7.3.4 Firmware rewriting from the control panel NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading. A.
Page 300 DSC2 *1: d-Color MF651/MF551 only *2: d-Color MF451 only *3: In d-Color MF651/MF551, this is displayed only when the function enhanced version 1 or later firmware is installed. NOTE • Unless one of the keys on the control panel is pressed, firmware is updated after 30 seconds when the unit has restarted.
Page 301: Firmware Rewriting From The Cs Remote Care
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the main screen. (2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble 1.
Page 302: Error Code List For The Internet Isw
[Service Mode] [Internet ISW] [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the OLIVETTI. 0x00000010 Parameter error • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode]...
Page 303 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. FIRMWARE REWRITING Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel 0x00111000 Error concerning the network • Check the User’s network environment. • Connection has been completed. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following set- ting.
Page 304 PSWC, etc. • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding 0x10000104 • There is no space for F/W data to be error code to the OLIVETTI. downloaded. 0x10000106 • Check sum error 0x10000107 File access error •...
Page 305: Commercially Available Parts
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Installing the key counter 8.1.1 Configuration A0P0F2C534DA [1] Key counter socket Key counter 8.1.2 Procedure NOTE • When mounting the key counter, either the optional key counter kit KIT-1 (4623- 472) or the key counter kit KIT-CF (4623-481) is necessary.
Page 306 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Remove the harness for the key counter from five wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. A0P0F2C531DA 6. Set the harness for the key counter to the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2].
Page 307 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS 9. Mount the edge cover [1] to the counter mounting bracket and set the harness to the edge cover. 10. Connect the key counter socket con- nector [2]. 11. Using two screws [4], secure the counter socket [3].
Page 308 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. When using the key counter kit KIT-CF (4623-481) 1. Remove the scanner right cover [1]. See P.85 2. Cut out the knockouts [2] of the scanner right cover. 3. Remove the two caps [3]. A0P0F2C530DA 4.
Page 309 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS 7. Mount the scanner right cover [1], and insert the harness for the key counter from the hole [2] where knockouts were removed from. A0P0F2C533DA 8. Using two screws [2], secure the counter mounting bracket [1].
Page 310 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. Using two screws [2], secure the key counter cover [1]. A00JF2C584DA 13. Select [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] [Key Counter Only], [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2 + Key Counter]. Set color mode and message.
Page 311: Installing The Original Size Detection 2 Sensor (Ps205)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Installing the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) 8.2.1 Procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1]. A0P0F2E586DA 3. Connect the connector [1] of the original size detection 2 sensor.
Page 312 8. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 6. Select [Service Mode] [Machine] [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj]. See P.464 A00JF2E588DA 7. Check to make sure that the [Org. Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set] is displayed on the original size detection sensor adjustment screen. Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 313: Adjustment/Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 9. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION ADJUSTMENT/SETTING HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks •...
Page 314: 10. Utility
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.1 List of utility mode NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting. • For displaying the keys with *, ** marks, see “Administrator Security Level.” See P.434 •...
Page 315 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings System Auto Paper Select for Small Original P.278 Settings Blank Page Print Settings** P.279 Page Number Print Position** P.279 Select Keyboard** P.279 Custom Copier Default Tab P.280 Display Settings...
Page 316 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings Copier Automatic Image Rotation P.288 Settings Finishing Program P.289 Card Shot Layout P.289 Settings Zoom P.289 Store Original Size P.289 Scan/Fax JPEG Compression Level P.290 Settings Black Compression Level P.290 TWAIN Lock Time...
Page 317 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings Printer PS Setting Print PS Errors P.298 Settings ICC Profile Photo-RGB Color P.298 Settings Photo-Output Profile Text-RGB Color Text-Output Profile Figure/Table Graph-RGB Color Figure/Table Graph- Output Profile Simulation-Profile Auto Trapping P.299...
Page 318 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Restrict User Copy Program Lock Settings P.308 Settings Settings Access Delete Saved Copy Program P.308 Restrict Changing Job Priority P.308 Access to Job Delete Other User Jobs P.308 Settings Registering and Changing...
Page 319 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Expert Density Thick 1/1+ -Yellow P.328 Settings Settings Adjustment Adjustment Thick 2/3/4-Yellow Thick 1/1+ -Magenta Thick 2/3/4-Magenta Thick 1/1+ -Cyan Thick 2/3/4-Cyan Thick 1/1+ -Black Thick 2/3/4-Black Black Image Density P.328 Image Stabilization Only...
Page 320 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Reset System Auto Reset P.346 Settings Settings Settings Auto Reset P.347 Job Reset When Account is changed P.347 When Original is set on ADF P.347 NEXT JOB Staple Setting P.347 Original Set/...
Page 321 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator One-Touch/ Create One- Address Book E-mail P.353 Settings User Box Touch Desti- User Box P.353 Registration nation P.353 PC (SMB) P.353 P.354 WebDAV P.354 IP Address Fax P.354 Internet Fax P.354...
Page 322 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator User Auth/Acct Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting P.365 Settings Authentica- Track Com- Single Color > 2 Color Output Management P.365 tion/ mon Setting Account Scan to Home Settings P.365 Track Scan to Authorized Folder Settings...
Page 323 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Network WebDAV WebDAV Client Settings P.399 Settings Settings Settings WebDAV Server Settings P.401 Web Service Web Service Common Settings P.401 Settings Printer Settings P.402 Scanner Settings P.403 SSDP Settings P.404 Detail...
Page 324 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Header Information P.413 Settings Settings Header/ Header Position P.413 Footer Print Receiver’s Name P.414 Position Footer Position P.414 Line Parame- Dialing Method P.414 ter Setting Receive Mode P.414 Number of RX Call Rings P.415...
Page 325 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Report Activity Report P.422 Settings Settings Settings TX Result Report P.422 Sequential TX Report P.422 Timer Reservation TX Report P.422 Confidential RX Report P.422 Bulletin TX Report P.423 Relay TX Result Report P.423...
Page 326 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Security Administrator Password P.433 Settings Settings User Box Administrator Setting P.433 Administrator Security Levels P.434 Security Password Rules P.434 Details Prohibited Functions When Authentication P.435 Error Confidential Document Access Method P.436 Manual Destination Input P.436...
Page 327 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Utility Mode Ref. page My Panel Language Setting P.450 Settings Measurement Unit Setting Copier Settings Scan/Fax Settings Color Selection Setting Main Menu Settings Initial Screen Setting Device Information P.450 Meter Count Check Print List Details Coverage Rate...
Page 328: 10.2 Starting/Exiting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.2 Starting/Exiting 10.2.1 Starting procedure 1. Press the Utility/Counter key. 2. The Utility Mode screen will appear. A0P0F3E543DA 10.2.2 Exiting procedure • Touch the [Close] key. Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 329: 10.3 Touch Panel Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.3 Touch Panel Adjustment A. Use • To adjust the position of the touch panel display • Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. •...
Page 330: 10.4 One-Touch User Box Registration
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.4 One-Touch User Box Registration • In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is set to ON, when you operate the copier without performing user authentication, this menu is not displayed.
Page 331: Create One-Touch Destination-Group
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY E. FTP (1) Use • To register/change FTP address to send scanned data. (2) Procedure • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting. F.
Page 332: Create One-Touch Destination-E-Mail Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.4.3 Create One-Touch destination-E-mail Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the management device 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] A. E-mail Subject (1) Use •...
Page 333: Create User Box-Bulletin Board User Box
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.4.6 Create User Box-Bulletin Board User Box • It will not be displayed when the authentication device 1 is set to “Set” by the following setting. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] •...
Page 334: Limiting Access To Destinations
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.4.8 Limiting Access to Destinations • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode] A. Outline • The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual user's access to each destination.
Page 335: 10.5 User Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5 User Settings 10.5.1 System Settings-Language Selection A. Use • To select the language on the LCD display. • To change the language used on the control panel. B. Procedure • The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] avail- able from [System 1] under Service Mode.
Page 336: System Settings-Auto Color Level Adjust
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 D. Print Lists • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.) •...
Page 337: System Settings-Power Save Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.5 System Settings-Power Save Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Administrator Security Level] • t will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or the vendor is mounted.
Page 338: System Settings-Ae Level Adjustment
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Output Tray Setting • It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526/527 or the job separator JS-504 is mounted. (1) Use • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports).
Page 339: System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.9 System Settings-Blank Page Print Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Administrator Security Levels] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]...
Page 340: Custom Display Settings-Copier Settings
• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys dis- played on the screen. C. Quick Settings 1, 2, 3, 4 • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. (1) Use •...
Page 341: Custom Display Settings-Scan/Fax Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.13 Custom Display Settings-Scan/Fax Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] A. Default Tab (1) Use •...
Page 342: Custom Display Settings-User Box Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 E. Default Address Book (1) Use • Sets a default screen display for the scan/fax mode where the address book is set to be displayed. (2) Procedure • The default setting is Index. “Index”...
Page 343: Custom Display Settings-Copy Screen
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.15 Custom Display Settings-Copy Screen • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reser- vation] is set to License.
Page 344: Custom Display Settings-Left Panel Display Default
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.5.18 Custom Display Settings-Left Panel Display Default A. Use • Specifies an item that is shown as a default on the left panel display. Job List (List Display) : Displays a list of jobs that are both being printed and waiting to be printed.
Page 345: Copier Settings-Auto Sort/Group Selection
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.22 Copier Settings-Auto Sort/Group Selection A. Use • Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of two or more sheets. Yes : Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed.
Page 346: Copier Settings-Default Enlarge Display Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.5.24 Copier Settings-Default Enlarge Display Settings • Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] [User Settings] [Copier Settings] in the enlarge display mode. A. Use • To make default settings for the enlarge display mode. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: •...
Page 347: Copier Settings-Enlargement Rotation
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.27 Copier Settings-Enlargement Rotation A. Use • Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or the Original glass) in the copying pro- cess.
Page 348: Copier Settings-Select Tray For Insert Sheet
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.5.31 Copier Settings-Select Tray for Insert Sheet • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Administrator Security Levels] A.
Page 349: Copier Settings-Finishing Program
10.5.36 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.”...
Page 350: Scan/Fax Settings-Jpeg Compression Level
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.5.37 Scan/Fax Settings-JPEG Compression Level A. Use • To set the JPEG compression method when scanning with JPEG while in scan/fax mode. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
Page 351: Scan/Fax Settings-Default Scan/Fax Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.40 Scan/Fax Settings-Default Scan/Fax Settings • This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to set in the [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice].
Page 352: Scan/Fax Settings-Compact Pdf/Xps Compression Level
10.5.44 Scan/Fax Settings-OCR Operation Setting • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-105) is activated.
Page 353: Printer Settings-Basic Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.46 Printer Settings-Basic Settings A. PDL Setting (1) Use • To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing. (2) Procedure • The default setting is Auto. “Auto” B. Number of Copies (1) Use •...
Page 354 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 F. Banner Sheet Setting (1) Use • To set whether or not to print on the banner (front cover) page. (2) Procedure • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” G. Binding Direction Adjustment (1) Use •...
Page 355: Printer Settings-Paper Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY J. Gray Background Text Correction (Fiery Controller) • It will be displayed when the optional image controller IC-412 is mounted. (1) Use • To make thin lines and small characters on a grayscale background more visible by cor- recting their line width when the optional image controller IC-412 is installed.
Page 356 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 D. Binding Position (1) Use • To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS, etc.
Page 357: Printer Settings-Pcl Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.48 Printer Settings-PCL Settings A. Font Settings (1) Use • To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
Page 358: Printer Settings-Ps Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 E. CR/LF Mapping (1) Use • To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. Mode 1 : CR CR-LF LF=LF FF=FF Mode 2 : CR=CR LF CR-LF FF CR-FF Mode 3 : CR CR-LF LF CR-LF FF CR-FF : Does not replace (2) Procedure...
Page 359: Printer Settings-Xps Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. Auto Trapping (1) Use • Select this option to superimpose neighboring colors to print so as to prevent white space being generated around a picture. : Adjacent colors are overprinted. If white lines appear at borders of colors on a graph or figure, select “ON.”...
Page 360: Printer Settings-Print Reports
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.5.51 Printer Settings-Print Reports • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.) A.
Page 361: Change Password
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.5.53 Change Password • When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete. • This menu is available only when box administrator authentication is established during user authentication or account track.
Page 362: Register Authentication Settings
10.5.56 Register Authentication Settings • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • It will be displayed when user authentication (MFP) is completed and the following is met;...
Page 363: Cellular Phone/Pda Setting-Print Settings
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting-Print Settings • It will be displayed only when the optional local interface kit EK-605 is mounted. • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines.
Page 364: 10.6 Administrator Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6 Administrator Settings • The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”) NOTE •...
Page 365: System Settings-Output Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY D. Enter Power Save Mode (1) Use • To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax/PC print during power save mode. Normal : Switches to the power save mode according to the normal power save mode after the printing.
Page 366: System Settings-Date/Time Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Shift Output Each Job • It will be displayed when the optional finisher FS-526/527 or the job separator JS-504 is mounted. (1) Use • To set whether to offset each job when paper is printed using the finisher. •...
Page 367: System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.5 System Settings-Weekly Timer Settings A. Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings (1) Use • To set whether to use or not to use the weekly timer. (2) Procedure • The default setting is OFF. “OFF”...
Page 368: System Settings-Restrict User Access
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.6 System Settings-Restrict User Access A. Copy Program Lock Settings (1) Use • To set the prohibition for modifying the registered copy program. (2) Procedure 1. Touch the key for the appropriate copy program. 2.
Page 369 “Allow” Restrict (7) Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. <Use> • Allow or restrict the registration or deletion of authentication information.
Page 370: System Settings-Expert Adjustment
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.7 System Settings-Expert Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
Page 371 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. Printer Adjustment (1) Leading Edge Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]...
Page 372 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Centering • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] •...
Page 373 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (3) Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]...
Page 374 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]...
Page 375 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (5) Erase Leading Edge • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. [Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator Feature Level] <Use> • To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper. •...
Page 376 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (6) Vertical Adjustment • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator Feature Level] <Use> • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. •...
Page 377 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (7) Media Adjustment <Use> • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. • This function is provided to open [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment] [2nd Transfer Adjust] of Service Mode up to administrator and the fine-adjusted value is reflected in the Service Mode setting.
Page 378 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Finisher Adjustment (1) Center Staple Position <Use> • Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple func- tion. • Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple func- tion.
Page 379 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (2) Half-Fold Position <Use> • Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing. <Procedure> Exit direction A11PF3C502DA 1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF. 2. Make a copy in the folding mode. 3.
Page 380 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (3) Tri-Fold Position Adjustment <Use> • Use this adjustment to adjust tri-fold position in tri-fold printing. <Procedure> First fold A11PF3C505DA 1. Make a copy sample in the tri-folding mode. 2. Check that the tri-fold positions (a) on the copy are within the specified range. Specification a: 95 mm (A4S), 89.4 mm (8.5x11S), 88 mm (16KS) Adjustment range: -10.0 mm to +10.0 mm (1 step: 0.1 mm) 3.
Page 381 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (4) Punch Vertical Position Adjustment <Use> • Adjusts the vertical position of the punch holes. <Procedure> A11TF3C510DA 1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode. 2. Make an adjustment so that 1/2 of the length A is within the following standard range. Specifications: 2-4 hole: A=80 ±...
Page 382 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (5) Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment <Use> • To change the horizontal position of the punch holes. <Procedure> A11TF3C511DA 1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode. 2. Make an adjustment so that the width B is within the following range. <For PK-516>...
Page 383 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (6) Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment <Use> • Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body. • To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.
Page 384 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (8) Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment <Use> • To adjust the position of the punch hole in the sub-scanning direction when ZU is in use. • Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606. <Procedure>...
Page 385 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (9) Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment <Use> • To adjust the position of the punch hole in the main scanning direction when ZU is in use. • Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606. <Procedure>...
Page 386 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (10) 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment <Use> • To adjust the positions of the 1st Z-fold and 2nd Z-fold for the Z-fold mode. • Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606. <Procedure>...
Page 387 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (11) Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor <Use> • To adjust sensitivity (light intensity) of the paper size detect board (PSDTB) of the punch unit of ZU. • Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606. <Procedure>...
Page 388 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 D. Density Adjustment (1) Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black <Use> • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transpar- encies. (Only black color adjustable for OHP transparencies) •...
Page 389 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY E. Image Stabilization (1) Image Stabilization Only <Use> • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. • Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed. •...
Page 390 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (3) Image Stabilization Setting <Use> • To change the type and timing of image stabilization. • To provide the desirable image stabilization control that depends on customer’s machine usage pattern, i.e. the ratio of color to black print. Standard : This mode is suitable for low-volume users and reduces the number of times image stabilization is carried out when the...
Page 391 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY G. Color Registration Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice]...
Page 392 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Check Procedure Check point X, Y Adjustment for X direction: If the cross deviates in the direction of A, Check point X increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of B, decrease the setting.
Page 393 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY H. Gradation Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] [Imaging Process Adjustment] [Dev. Bias Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set.
Page 394 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Scanner Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section. • If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator Feature Level]...
Page 395 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (1) Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge <Use> • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
Page 396 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Scanner Adjustment: Centering <Use> • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accu- racy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. • When the CCD unit is replaced. •...
Page 397 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (3) Horizontal Adjustment <Use> • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section. • The CCD unit has been replaced. <Procedure> A0P0F3C509DA • Measure C width on the color chart and on the test print, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
Page 398 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Vertical Adjustment <Use> • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section • The exposure unit has been replaced. • The scanner motor has been replaced. •...
Page 399 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY J. ADF Adjustment • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator Feature Level] (1) Centering <Use> • To adjust the read position in the Main Scanning Direction. •...
Page 400 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Original Stop Position <Use> • To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes. • When the result is Unable in the [Auto Adj. of Stop Position]. <Procedure>...
Page 401 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (3) Centering Auto Adjustment <Use> • To automatically adjust the read position in the Main Scanning Direction. • When ADF has been replaced. <Procedure> 1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 2.
Page 402 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 K. Line Detection (1) Prior Detection Setting <Use> • To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. • To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. •...
Page 403 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY L. Trail Edge Adjust (1) Use • To adjust trail edge if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift at trail edge. •...
Page 404 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 M. User Paper Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [Administrator Feature Level] (1) Use • To set and register individual user paper that includes different basic weight and transfer output fine adjustment data.
Page 405: System Settings-List/Counter
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY N. Erase Adjustment (1) Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings <Use> • Configure Non-Image Area operation settings. Auto : Automatically detects the background density of the original, and selects either [Bevel] or [Rectangular] accordingly. Specify : Allows you to manually specify an erase method and original density.
Page 406: System Settings-Reset Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Meter Counter List • Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device, management device 2, vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] <Use>...
Page 407 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. Auto Reset (1) Use • To set the period of time until auto reset starts functioning in “Copy” and “Scan/Fax.” (2) Procedure • The default setting is 1 min. “1 min.” (1 to 9, No) C.
Page 408: System Settings-User Box Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (5) Next Job: Reset Data After Job <Use> • To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting fax when the scanning is finished or fax is transmitted, making the next job setting available. (The address will be cleared even when [OFF] is selected.) <Procedure>...
Page 409 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY E. ID & Print Delete Time (1) Use • Specifies whether to delete ID & print data stored in the box after a lapse of a predeter- mined period of time. Sets the time period for which ID & print data can be stored (2) Procedure •...
Page 410: System Settings-Standard Size Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting (1) Use • Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed. (2) Procedure •...
Page 411: System Settings-Stamp Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.12 System Settings-Stamp Settings A. Header/Footer Settings (1) Use • Saves or deletes header/footer settings. • Able to obtain registered header/footer data by [Application] [Stamp/Composition] (2) Procedure • Touch [New] to register new headers and footers. B.
Page 412: System Settings-Skip Job Operation Settings
2. Check test print and fine adjust the position. 10.6.18 System Settings-Advanced Preview Setting • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Original direction setting display (1) Use •...
Page 413: Administrator/Machine Settings-Input Machine Address
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.20 Administrator/Machine Settings-Input Machine Address A. Use • To register the name of the machine and e-mail address. Machine Name : When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of document registered in Box is generated automatically, it is added.
Page 414 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (5) FTP <Use> • To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP. <Procedure> • Touch [New] to register the new address. • Select any displayed address to check, edit, or delete the setting. (6) WebDAV <Use>...
Page 415: One-Touch/User Box Registration-Create User Box
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (2) E-mail Body <Use> • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. <Procedure> • Touch [New] to register the new message. • Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting. •...
Page 416: One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.23 One-Touch/User Box Registration-One-Touch/User Box Registration List A. Address Book List (1) Use • To output the address book list. (2) Procedure 1. Select the destination type to be output. 2. Touch [Starting destination No.] and enter the number from which output starts. 3.
Page 417: One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number Of User Boxes
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.24 One-Touch/User Box Registration-Maximum Number of User Boxes A. Use • Set the maximum of public, personal, and group boxes that individual users can hold. B. Procedure 1. Select a user box type and name. 2.
Page 418 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Public User Access (1) Use • To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User authentication has been set. • Able to use the machine without authentication by logging in as a public user when [ON (Without Login)] is selected.
Page 419 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY F. When # of Jobs Reach Maximum (1) Use • To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job, or to stop the machine, when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the user authentication and the account track.
Page 420: User Authentication/Account Track-User Authentication Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Scanner Settings • It will be displayed only when the optional image controller IC-412 is mounted and user authentication or account track has been set. (1) Use • To select whether to use TWAIN scan function available in Fiery Remote Scan when user authentication or account track is set to on.
Page 421 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (3) ID & Print Settings <Use> • To set whether to use ID & Print (a job sent by a user cannot be printed until the user authentication is completed). • To set whether to print a job of unauthenticated or public user or to save the job into the ID &...
Page 422: User Authentication/Account Track-Account Track Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. User Counter (1) Use • To display the status of use of the copy+print, copy, print and scan/fax for each user. (2) Procedure 1. Select the user and touch [Counter Details]. 2.
Page 423: User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.29 User Authentication/Account Track-Print Counter List • The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication or account track. • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, authen- tication device1 or management device 2 is mounted.
Page 424: User Authentication/Account Track-Authentication Device Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Apply Levels/Groups to Users (1) Use • Sets Apply Level or Apply Group for individual users. (2) Procedure Select a registered user. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings.
Page 425: User Authentication/Account Track-Auth/Acct Track Common Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. Logoff Settings (1) Use • Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy document is scanned. (2) Procedure • The default setting is Do not log off. “Do not log off”...
Page 426: User Authentication/Account Track-Scan To Authorized Folder Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.35 User Authentication/Account Track-Scan to Authorized Folder Settings A. Use • Use to restrict specification of sending destinations by users. • Enabling this item disables manual entry of destinations except for recipients of faxes or IP address faxes.
Page 427 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. IPv6 Settings (1) Use • To set whether or not to use IP address (IPv6). • To set whether to enter the IP address (IPv6) directly or to obtain it automatically. (2) Procedure •...
Page 428 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 E. DNS Domain (1) Use • To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name. • To set the DNS default domain name. • To set the DNS search domain name. (2) Procedure <DNS Domain Name Auto Retrieval>...
Page 429 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY H. IPsec Settings (1) Use • To set whether to use IPsec protocol for IP network communication. (2) Procedure • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” • When selecting [ON], make settings in [IKE Setting], [IPSec SA Setting], and [Peer]. IPsec Settings-IKE Settings (1) Use •...
Page 430 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 J. IPsec Settings-IPsec SA Settings (1) Use • To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8). (2) Procedure <Group Set Number>...
Page 431 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY K. IPsec Settings-Peer (1) Use • To register destinations used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10). (2) Procedure <Peer> • Among Group 1 to 10, select a group where settings are made. •...
Page 432: Network Setting-Netware Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 N. RAW Port Number (1) Use • To set the RAW port number. • Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports. (2) Procedure 1. Select the necessary port number. 2.
Page 433 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. NetWare Print Settings (1) Use • To set whether to use the NetWare print mode. • To set the NetWare print mode. • To display NetWare status. (2) Procedure <NetWare Print Settings> •...
Page 434 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 F. P Server Settings: File Server Name (1) Use • To set the full server name for the print server to logon. (2) Procedure 1. Touch [File Server Name]. 2. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Page 435: Network Setting-Http Server Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.38 Network Setting-http Server Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] A. http Server Settings (1) Use •...
Page 436 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 F. Printer Information (1) Use • To set the printer information. (2) Procedure 1. Touch [Printer Information]. 2. Enter the printer name, printer location, and printer information on the on-screen key- board. 3.
Page 437: Network Setting-Ftp Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.39 Network Setting-FTP Settings A. FTP TX Settings (1) Use • To set whether to use FTP TX settings. (2) Procedure • The default setting is ON. “ON” B. FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address (1) Use •...
Page 438: Network Setting-Smb Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 F. FTP Server Settings (1) Use • To set whether to use this machine as FTP server. (2) Procedure • The default setting is ON. “ON” NOTE • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhanced Security Mode]...
Page 439 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. Print Settings (1) Use • To set whether to use SMB port or not in printer mode. (2) Procedure • The default setting is ON. “ON” C. Print Settings: NetBIOS Name (1) Use •...
Page 440: Network Setting-Ldap Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 G. WINS Settings: Automatic Retrieval Settings (1) Use • To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the WINS server address. • To acquire the WINS server address automatically. •...
Page 441 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. Setting Up LDAP • Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP server can be conducted. • Touch [Setting Up LDAP], and select the optional blank key to register and/or set. (1) LDAP Server Name <Use>...
Page 442 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (6) Reset All Settings <Use> • To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the ship- ping. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Reset All Settings]. 2. Check the message and touch [Yes]. 3.
Page 443 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (12) Certificate Verification Level Settings) <Use> • To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate. <Procedure> Expiration Date : Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period. Key Usage : Select whether to check that the server certificate is used according to the purpose approved by the issuer.
Page 444 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (14) Select Server Authentication Method <Use> • To set the authentication system when conducting LDAP server authentication. • To use when changing the server authentication system. Use Set Value : It conducts authentication with the setting value set by [LDAP Server Registration].
Page 445: Network Setting-E-Mail Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (18) Domain Name <Use> • To set the domain name for connecting to LDAP server. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Domain Name]. 2. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Page 446 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Total Counter Notification <Use> • To set whether or not to inform the total counter by e-mail. <Procedure> • The default setting is ON. “ON” (5) SMTP Server Address <Use> • To set the SMTP server address. <Procedure>...
Page 447 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (10) SSL Setting <Use> • To set whether or not to use SSL when sending an e-mail. <Procedure> • The default setting is OFF. SMTP over SSL Start TLS “OFF” (11) Port No. <Use>...
Page 448 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (14) Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication <Use> • To set whether or not to enable SMTP authentication. <Procedure> • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” • When set to “ON”, enter the [User ID], [Password] and [Domain Name]. (15) Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication <Use>...
Page 449 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (4) SSL Setting <Use> • To set whether or not to use SSL when receiving an e-mail. <Procedure> • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” (5) Port No. <Use> • To set the port No. for transmitting with POP server. <Procedure>...
Page 450 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (8) Login Name <Use> • To enter a login name used for POP server authentication. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Login Name]. 2. Enter a login name. (9) Password <Use> • To enter a login name used for POP server authentication. <Procedure>...
Page 451 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. S/MIME Communication Settings (1) Use • To set whether to activate S/MINE communication that provides encrypted E-mail trans- mission. (2) Procedure • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” D. S/MIME Communication Settings-Digital Signature (1) Use •...
Page 452: Network Setting-Snmp Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 H. S/MIME Communication Settings-Certificate Verification Level Settings) (1) Use • To verify the server certificate, configure settings to verify the certificate. (2) Procedure Expiration Date : Select whether to check that the server certificate is within the validity period.
Page 453 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. SNMP v1/v2c Settings (1) Use • To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c. • To use when entering the community name for reading the Management Information Base (MIB) and writing to it. (2) Procedure <Read Community Name Settings>...
Page 454 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Read User Name Settings <Use> • To set the read-only user name used for SNMP v3. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Read User Name]. 2. Enter the read user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Page 455 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (8) Security Level <Use> • To set the security level for the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3. : Authentication will not be conducted when reading/writing authority user accesses. auth-password : Conducts authentication only with authentication password when reading/writing authority user accesses.
Page 456: Network Setting-Appletalk Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.44 Network Setting-AppleTalk Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] A. AppleTalk Settings (1) Use •...
Page 457: Network Setting-Tcp Socket Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.46 Network Setting-TCP Socket Settings A. TCP Socket (1) Use • To set whether or not to set the TCP socket. • To set the port number for TCP socket transmission. (2) Procedure •...
Page 458: Network Setting-Network Fax Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.47 Network Setting-Network Fax Setting • It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to “OFF” in the following set- tings. [Service Mode] [System 2] [Network Fax Settings] A.
Page 459: Network Setting-Webdav Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. SMTP RX Settings (1) Use • To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used. • To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used.
Page 460 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) WebDAV Client Settings: User Name <Use> • To set the user name for WebDAV authentication. <Procedure> 1. Touch [User Name]. 2. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK]. (5) WebDAV Client Settings: Password <Use>...
Page 461: Network Setting-Web Service Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. WebDAV Server Settings (1) WebDAV Server Setting <Use> • To set whether to use WebDAV Server Settings. <Procedure> • The default setting is ON. “ON” (2) WebDAV Server Settings: SSL Setting •...
Page 462 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Web Service Common Settings: Publication Service <Use> • To set whether or not to enable Publication Service. • Select [Enable] when using this machine under an environment where communication is possible only with Windows Vista’s IPv6. <Procedure>...
Page 463 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (2) Printer Settings: Printer Name <Use> • To set the WS printer name. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Printer Name]. 2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Page 464: Network Setting-Ssdp Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Scanner Settings: Scanner Information <Use> • To set the WS scanner information. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Scanner Information]. 2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
Page 465 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (3) LLTD Setting <Use> • To set whether or not to enable LLTD (Link Layer Topology Discovery). • By enabling LLTD, Windows Vista’s Network Map can show this machine’s location on the network. <Procedure>...
Page 466 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 F. Time Adjustment Setting-Polling Interval (1) Use • To set a polling interval when Auto Time Adjustment is set to ON. (2) Procedure 1. Press the Clear key. 2. Enter a polling interval within the range between 1 to 240 hours with the 10-key pad. G.
Page 467 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (3) Register Notification Address (E-mail Address) <Use> • To set E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. • Up to 10 addresses can be registered. <Procedure> 1. Touch [Forward]. 2. From E-mail addresses 1 to 10, select an E-mail address where settings are made. 3.
Page 468 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Send Now <Use> • To transfer the current total counter value to the set address. PING Confirmation (1) Use • To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING. (2) Procedure 1. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission. 2.
Page 469: Network Settings-Ieee802.1X Authentication Settings
10.6.53 Network Settings-Web Browser Setting • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • It will be displayed only when the optional i-Option (LK-101 v2 or LK-103 v2) is activated.
Page 470: Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting
10.6.54 Network Settings-Bluetooth Setting • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Invalid.”...
Page 471: Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.59 Copier Settings-Print Jobs During Copy Operation A. Use • To set whether to receive printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation. • To restrict receiving printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation. Accept : Receives the print data or fax data and print Receive Only...
Page 472: Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.62 Copier Settings-Card Shot Settings • It will be displayed in d-Color MF6521/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Layout (1) Use •...
Page 473: Printer Settings-Print Xps Errors
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.65 Printer Settings-Print XPS Errors A. Use • To set whether to print error information when an error occurs while printing a XPS file. B. Procedure • The default setting is Yes. “Yes”...
Page 474: Fax Settings-Line Parameter Setting
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Print Receiver’s Name • It will not be displayed on the screen when [Fax Target] is set to beside “US” or “HK” in the following settings. [Service Mode] [System 1] [Marketing Area] (1) Use •...
Page 475 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. Number of RX Call Rings (1) Use • To set the number of times to receive call rings. • To change the number of times of the fake ringback tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving.
Page 476: Fax Settings-Tx/Rx Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.71 Fax Settings-TX/RX Settings A. Duplex Print (RX) • It will not be displayed when [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to “ON.” (1) Use • To set whether to carry out the duplex print for the received original when receiving fax. (2) Procedure •...
Page 477 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY E. Incorrect User Box No. Entry (1) Use • To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. (2) Procedure • The default setting is Print. “Print” Show Error Message Auto Create User Box F.
Page 478: Fax Settings-Function Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.72 Fax Settings-Function Settings A. Function ON/OFF Setting (1) F-Code TX <Use> • To set whether to use the F code transmission. <Procedure> • The default setting is ON. “ON” NOTE • When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
Page 479 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (4) Destination Check Display Function <Use> • To set whether or not to display the list of specified addresses when sending the fax. <Procedure> • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” (5) Confirm Address (TX) <Use>...
Page 480 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Closed Network RX • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] [FAX] [System] [Display Setting] [Closed area RX] (1) Use • To set whether to use the closed network function. •...
Page 481: Fax Settings-Pbx Connection Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY F. PC-Fax RX Setting • It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Set- ting] is set to “ON.” (1) Use • To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function. •...
Page 482: Fax Settings-Report Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.74 Fax Settings-Report Settings A. Activity Report • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] (1) Use •...
Page 483 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY F. Bulletin TX Report (1) Use • To set whether to print out the bulletin TX report or not. (2) Procedure • The default setting is ON. “ON” G. Relay TX Result Report •...
Page 484 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 J. Broadcast Result Report (1) Use • To set the format to output the broadcast result report. All Destinations : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses Each Destination : Outputs a report after each transmission (2) Procedure •...
Page 485: Fax Settings-Job Settings List
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY N. DSN Message • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] [Network Setting] [Network Fax Setting] [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Use •...
Page 486: Fax Settings-Multi Lines Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.76 Fax Settings-Multi Lines Settings • It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) line 2 is mounted. A. Line Parameter Setting (1) Dialing Method <Use> • To set the dial method for the expanded line. <Procedure>...
Page 487: Fax Settings-Network Fax Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. Multi Lines Setting (1) Use • To set the system for using each line when using more than one line. (2) Procedure <Multi Line Usage> • When selecting [Normal], perform the transmission setting for Line 2. <Line 2 Setting>...
Page 488 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Color/Grayscale Multi-Value Compression Method • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [Network Fax Settings] [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Use...
Page 489 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY D. I-Fax Advanced Settings • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [Network Fax Settings] [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Use •...
Page 490: System Connection-Openapi Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 E. IP Address Fax Operation Settings • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • It will not be displayed when [IP Address Fax Function] is set to “OFF” in the following settings.
Page 491 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY B. SSL/Port Settings (1) Use • To set the SSL/access port for other systems with OpenAPI. (2) Procedure <SSL Setting> • The default setting is Non-SSL Only. “Non-SSL Only” SSL Only SSL/Non-SSL <Port No./Port No.(SSL)>...
Page 492: System Connection-Call Remote Center
See P.491 10.6.80 System Connection-Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. (1) Use • Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.
Page 493: Security Settings-Administrator Password
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.83 Security Settings-Administrator Password A. Use • To set/change the administrator password. B. Procedure • Enter the administrator password on the on-screen keyboard. Current Password : Enter the current administrator password New Password : Enter the new administrator password to be used Re-Input Password : Re-enter the new administrator password NOTE...
Page 494: Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.85 Security Settings-Administrator Security Levels • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] A. Use •...
Page 495 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY (2) Procedure • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Enhances Security Mode] • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “OFF.” [Service Mode] [Enhanced Security] [CE Authentication]...
Page 496 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Procedure • The default setting is Mode 1. “Mode 1” Mode 2 NOTE • [Mode1] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode] •...
Page 497 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY E. Print Data Capture (1) Use • To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the print job data. • To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] [System 2] [Data capture]. (2) Procedure •...
Page 498 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 H. Hide Personal Information • It will not be displayed when the two settings below are as follows: The authentication device is set in [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Function Man- agement Choice] [Authentication Device].
Page 499 “OFF” M. Copy Guard • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF5521 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. • It will be displayed only when the optional security kit SC-507 is mounted.
Page 500: Security Settings-Enhanced Security Mode
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 O. Web browser contents access • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. (1) Use • To set whether to enable or disable access to locally-stored files (pre-installed contents, image files, and help files) from the web browser that is interacting with MFP via OpenAPI applications.
Page 501: Security Settings-Hdd Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Name of the function Default setting When Enhanced Security Mode is ON Job History Thumbnail OFF (Cannot be changed) Display ON (Cannot be changed) FTP Server OFF (Cannot be changed) SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write allowed Only “Read” is allowed (Cannot be changed) SNMPv3 auth-password/ Cannot be changed to disable authentication...
Page 502 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Overwrite HDD Data • When the image becomes unnecessary, temporary data overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are stored, and destroy the image data itself. The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen, the remain- ing data included in the image data will not leak.
Page 503 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY C. Overwrite All Data (1) Use • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. • To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM. • To use when disposing of the hard disk. •...
Page 504 10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 E. Format HDD (1) Use • To conduct logical formatting of HDD. NOTE • It is subject to logical formatting here, therefore if starting with physical format- ting, follow as [Service Mode] [State Confirmation] [Memory/HDD Adj.] [HDD Format].
Page 505: Security Settings-Function Management Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.89 Security Settings-Function Management Setting A. Each Function Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 or Management Device is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] (1) Use •...
Page 506: Security Settings-Stamp Settings
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 D. Authentication Time Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] [Billing Setting] [Management Function Choice] (1) Use • To set the authentication mode when authentication device is used. •...
Page 507: Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY 10.6.91 Security Settings-Image Log Transfer Settings • It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.63 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. [Service Mode] [System 2] [Software Switch Setting] A.
Page 508: License Settings-Get Request Code
10. UTILITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10.6.93 License Settings-Get Request Code A. Use • To display and print a request code and serial number used to activate i-Option. • Used to confirm the request code and serial number. B.
Page 509: Openapi Authentication Management-Restriction Code Setting
10. UTILITY 10.6.96 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Restriction Code Setting • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Use • These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third vendor.
Page 510: 10.8 My Panel Settings
• Depending on the functions provided by each MFP and the optional device config- uration, not all My Panel settings may not take effect. 10.9 Device Information • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Use •...
Page 511 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 10. UTILITY Blank Page Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 512: 11. Adjustment Item List
11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Print Positioning: Leading Edge Printer ❍ Print Positioning: Side Edge Area (1) (4) Paper Feed Direction Adj. Image position: Leading Edge Image position: Side Edge Scan Area...
Page 513 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 11. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST ❍ (5) (2) (3) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ (1) (1) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 514: 12. Service Mode
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.1 List of service mode ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. Service Mode Ref. Page Machine Color alignment Adjustment P.461 Fusing Temperature P.462...
Page 515 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Service Mode Ref. Page Imaging Process Thick Paper Density Thick 1,1+ P.488 Adjustment Adjustment Thick 2,3,4 Paper separation adjustment P.489 TCR Toner Supply P.489 Monochrome Density Adjustment P.490 Development AC Voltage Choice P.490 CS Remote Care P.491...
Page 516 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Service Mode Ref. Page System 2 Network Fax Settings P.540 Image Stabilization Setting P.540 User Paper Settings P.541 Coverage Rate Screen P.542 JAM Code Display Setting P.542 Boot up Screen P.542 Install Data P.543 Bluetooth Settings...
Page 517 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Service Mode Ref. Page State Confirmation Memory/HDD Adj. Memory Check P.575 Compress / Decompression Check P.576 Memory Bus Check P.576 DSC Bus Check P.576 HDD R/W Check P.577 HDD Format P.577 Memory/HDD State P.577 Color Regist...
Page 518 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Service Mode Ref. Page Finisher *3 FS-FN adjustment *3 Center Staple Position *3 P.597 Half-Fold Position *4 *5 P.598 Punch Vertical Position *9 P.599 Punch Horizontal Position *10 P.600 Punch edge detection *9 P.601 Punch vertical position (Z-fold) *7 P.602...
Page 519: 12.2 Starting/Exiting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.2 Starting/Exiting 12.2.1 Starting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs. A. Procedure 1.
Page 520: 12.3 Date/Time Input Mode
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 NOTE • Be sure to change the CE password from its default value. • For the procedure to change the CE password, see the Enhanced Security. See P.619 B. Exiting procedure •...
Page 521: 12.4 Machine
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4 Machine 12.4.1 Color Alignment Adjustment A. Use • To adjust color shift if color shift is found at the trailing edge of either plain paper or thick paper by the comparison of originals and their output. •...
Page 522: Fusing Temperature
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.2 Fusing Temperature A. Use • To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions.
Page 523: Fusing Transport Speed
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] [Fusing Transport Speed]. 3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. <d-Color MF651> Transport speed Paper Setting 310 mm/s...
Page 524: Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.4 Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. A. Use • To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the original size detection sen- sor/1. • To display if the original size detection sensor/2 is mounted. •...
Page 525: Printer Area-Leading Edge Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.5 Printer Area-Leading Edge Adjustment A. Use • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types. (To adjust the timing where paper is sent out from the timing roller) •...
Page 526: Printer Area-Centering
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.6 Printer Area-Centering A. Use • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The PH Unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. •...
Page 527: Printer Area-Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.7 Printer Area-Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2) A. Use • For individual types of paper, this function allows the adjustment of the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing. •...
Page 528: Printer Area-Centering (Duplex 2Nd Side)
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.8 Printer Area-Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) A. Use • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2- Sided mode. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. B.
Page 529: Printer Area-Paper Feed Direction Adj
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.9 Printer Area-Paper Feed Direction Adj. A. Use • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. • Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary. • The print image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk). •...
Page 530: Scan Area
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.10 Scan Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section. • If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. COLOR CHART COLOR CHART 1.25 Color is “hue”,...
Page 531: Scan Area-Image Position: Leading Edge
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.11 Scan Area-Image Position: Leading Edge A. Use • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
Page 532: Scan Area-Image Position: Side Edge
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.12 Scan Area-Image Position: Side Edge A. Use • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of scanner parts and their mounting accu- racy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. •...
Page 533: Scan Area-Cross Direction Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.13 Scan Area-Cross Direction Adjustment A. Use • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section. • The CCD unit has been replaced. B. Procedure A0P0F3C509DA •...
Page 534: Scan Area-Feed Direction Adjustment
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.14 Scan Area-Feed Direction Adjustment A. Use • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section. • The exposure has been replaced. • The scanner motor has been replaced. •...
Page 535: Printer Resist Loop
• Use “Paper Passage” for paper passage check. • When a paper skew occurs. • When a paper misfeed occurs. B. Procedure • The adjustable range is different depending on paper source and processing speed. <d-Color MF651> Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 LCT Manual Duplex...
Page 536: Color Registration Adjustment-Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.16 Color Registration Adjustment-Cyan, Magenta, Yellow A. Use • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift. •...
Page 537: Skew Adjustment-Skew Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.17 Skew adjustment-Skew adjustment A. Use • This function allows you to set the default position of the skew correction motor. • Adjusts and sets a value that is used as an individual skew correction motor's reference position for skew correction control.
Page 538: Ld Adjustment-Ld Delay Adjust
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (1) Skew adjustment result on the panel • Skew adjustment result is provided in [Skew Adjust Value], which is selected as follows: [Service Mode] [State Confirmation] [Color Regist]. A0P0F3E546DA Skew Adjust Value Description Initial •...
Page 539: Ld Adjustment-Ld Lightness Balance Adjust
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.20 LD adjustment-LD lightness balance adjust. A. Use • This function adjusts the LD lightness balance between the two LDs to correct the differ- ence of LD lightness between the LDs. •...
Page 540: Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.4.21 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment A. Use • To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide. • Use when the bypass paper width detection resistor of the manual bypass guide has been changed.
Page 541: Split Line Prior Detection
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.4.24 Split Line Prior Detection A. Use • To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result. • To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the main/sub power switch is turned ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
Page 542: 12.5 Firmware Version
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.5 Firmware Version A. Use • To check the firmware version. • Use when the firmware is upgraded. • When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced. B. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
Page 543: Transfer Belt-Cleaning Bias
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE NOTE • Depending on the size of the test pattern, it is set in a different position. Set the test pattern according to the instructions displayed on the control panel. 7. Place ten blank sheets of paper on the test pattern and lower the original cover. 8.
Page 544: Transfer Belt-Auto Cleaning
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.6.3 Transfer Belt-Auto Cleaning A. Use • To set whether to perform the long regular transfer belt cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec). • The long cleaning operation (approx. 30 seconds) can be used to take more effective measures against toner filming on the surface of the transfer belt.
Page 545: Tcr Level Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.6.5 TCR Level Setting A. Use • To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change. •...
Page 546: Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Primary Transfer Adj
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.6.7 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Primary transfer adj. A. Use • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage. • To use when white spots appeared. B. Procedure • The default setting is 0. -8 to +7 (step: 1) *1 step is equivalent to 2 A.
Page 547: Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Secondary Transfer Adj
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.6.8 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment-Secondary transfer adj. A. Use • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. •...
Page 548: Stabilizer-Initialize+Image Stabilization
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.6.10 Stabilizer-Initialize+Image Stabilization A. Use • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabiliza- tion control has been initialized. • Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed. •...
Page 549: Paper Separation Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.6.12 Paper separation adjustment A. Use • By changing the period between the activation of the timing roller and the 2nd image transfer output, the paper separation position can be adjusted for the 1st and 2nd sides of paper in duplex print that uses thin paper.
Page 550: Monochrome Density Adjustment
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.6.14 Monochrome Density Adjustment A. Use • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black print. • To vary the density of the printed image of a black print. B.
Page 551: 12.7 Cs Remote Care
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.7 CS Remote Care 12.7.1 Outlines • CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to control the machine. •...
Page 552 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Clearing the RAM 3. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting]. 4. Touch [RAM Clear]. 5.
Page 553 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Inputting the device telephone number Proceed to step 12. 1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
Page 554 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Executing the initial transmission Receiving the initial connection E-mail mes- 1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], sage and touch [Detail Setting].
Page 555 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Procedure Step http http (bilateral communication) (unilateral communication: Device to Center) Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care 1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting]. 2.
Page 556: Software Sw Setting For Cs Remote Care
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Procedure Step http http (bilateral communication) (unilateral communication: Device to Center) Executing the initial transmission 1. Select [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting]. 2. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission. NOTE •...
Page 557 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE SW No. Functions Ref. Page • Retransmission interval on E-Mail/http delivery error P.500 • Retransmission times on E-Mail/http delivery error P.501 • Time zone settings P.501 • Timer 1 RING reception CONNECT reception P.501 •...
Page 558 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: FF 1111 1111 Logic Functions Description Auto call on the zero reset of the fixed parts Disable Enable replacement Auto call of the IR shortage Disable Enable Auto call on the IC Life...
Page 559 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 02 0000 0010 Logic Functions Description 7-2 Reservation 1-0 CS Remote Care communication mode DATA E-mail Not available SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 03 0000 0011 Logic Functions...
Page 560 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 0A 0000 1010 Logic Functions Description 7-0 Modem redial times 0000 0000 0 time 0000 0001 1 time 0000 1010 10 times 0110 0010 98 times 0110 0011 99 times Others...
Page 561 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 0A 0000 1010 Logic Functions Description 7-0 Retransmission times on E-mail/http delivery 0000 0000 0 time error 0000 0001 1 time 0000 1010 10 times 0110 0010 98 times 0110 0011...
Page 562 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 40 0100 0000 Logic Functions Description 7-0 Timer 2 0000 0000 Not available Dial request completed CONNECT 0000 0001 1 sec reception 0100 0000 64 sec 1111 1110 254 sec 1111 1111...
Page 563 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 01 0000 0001 Logic Functions Description 7-1 Reservation Attention display To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but the power for the modem is OFF.
Page 564 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 00 0000 0000 Logic Functions Description 7-3 Reservation Automatic transmission of chronological mis- feed data at the time of transmission of mis- feed frequent occurrence warning Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence If the number of jams threshold value...
Page 565: Setup Confirmation
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE SW No. Default 7654 3210 HEX: 05 0000 0101 Logic Functions Description 7-0 Original-based misfeed frequent occurrence 0000 0001 threshold value 0000 0010 0000 0101 0000 1110 0000 1111 Others Not available 12.7.4 Setup confirmation •...
Page 566: Calling The Center From The Administrator
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.7.6 Calling the center from the administrator • When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center. 1. Select [Administrator Settings], and touch [System Connection]. 2.
Page 567 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE C. Detail Setting (1) Basic Setting (E-Mail1, E-Mail2, Modem or Fax) <Use> • Execute the primary setting. • Use to change the set contents. • Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center. <Procedure>...
Page 568 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 <Initial Transmission> • Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care center to register the machine. (Only when the modem or fax is selected on the system Input.) (2) Basic Setting (http1 or http2) <Use>...
Page 569 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (4) RAM Clear <Use> • To clear the following data at the center ID Code, Primary Setting, Date/Time Input (Time Zone), Software SW Setting and AT Command. • To be used for setting CS Remote Care. •...
Page 570 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (8) AT Command <Use> • To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization. • This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting. <Procedure>...
Page 571 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE D. Server Setting (E-Mail1 or E-mail2 is selected.) (1) Server for RX-POP3 server <Use> • To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the address of the POP3 Server. •...
Page 572 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (6) Receive-Mail Check <Use> • To set whether or not to use mail check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care. • To change the time interval for mail check. <Procedure>...
Page 573 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (11) Send-SMTP Connection Time-out <Use> • To set the timeout period for transmission. <Procedure> • The default setting is 60 Sec. “60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec) (12) Send-Authentication Setting <Use> •...
Page 574 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 E. Server Setting (http1 or http2 is selected) (1) HTTP Server Settings <Use> • To set a http server at the other end that is used in CS Remote Care. <Procedure> <URL>...
Page 575: List Of The Cs Remote Care Error Code
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code A. When connecting by modem Error code Error Solution 0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) • Transmit again manually. 0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit- •...
Page 576: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Error code Error Solution 001A Device ID inconsistency • Check device ID setting of the (Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side. of start request telegram.) •...
Page 577 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE B. When connecting by e-mails Error code Error Solution 0001 Connection timeout during transmission • Check the SMTP server on User side. 0### Transmission error • Check the SMTP server on ###: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) User side.
Page 578 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Error code Error Solution 3000 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. 3001 POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. 3002 POP3_CONNECT_ERR • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side.
Page 579 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE C. When connecting by http Error code Error Solution 0001 Connection timeout during transmission • Check the http server on User side. 0*** Transmission error • Check the http server on User ###: http responding code (hexadecimal) side.
Page 580 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Error code Error Solution 2005 http request result problem • Check user network environment. • Response header receive response failure • Check http server environment. 2006 http request result problem • Response body receive response failure 2007 http request result problem •...
Page 581 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Error code Error Solution 3017 http request result problem • Check user network environment. • As the device application specified • Check http server environment. MIO_REQBODY_ERROR, process was stopped. 4103 Not Ready •...
Page 582: Troubleshooting For Cs Remote Care
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below. 1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] [Detail Setting].
Page 583: System 1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.8 System 1 12.8.1 Marketing Area A. Use • To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area. • Upon setup. B. Procedure <Marketing Area>...
Page 584: Tel/Fax Number
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 NOTE • The language used in the service mode depends on the Language Selection set- ting, and changes to the language as following table. Language Selection Service Mode Japanese Japanese Simplified Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Traditional Chinese...
Page 585: No Sleep
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.8.4 No Sleep A. Use • To display the option of “OFF” for the sleep mode setting screen available from adminis- trator settings. NOTE • The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF.” B.
Page 586: Install Date
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.8.7 Install Date A. Use • To register the date the main body was installed. • Upon setup. B. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 2. Select the key as follows. [System 1] [Install Date].
Page 587 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE B. Address Registration Data (1) Use • To clear address registration data. • Use this feature to initialize address registration data. • The following are address registration data: Group address data, Program key data, One-touch destination data, Mail body data, Subject data, Prefix/suffix data (2) Procedure 1.
Page 588: Initialization-System Error Clear
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.8.10 Initialization-System Error Clear A. Use • To reset the trouble data. • Use to clear the [Jam], [Trouble], [Error] displays, and other improper displays. • For details on items to be cleared, see “CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION.”...
Page 589: Trouble Isolation
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.8.13 Trouble Isolation A. Use • Individual units and options have a set or unset setting for the trouble isolation function. • When a problem occurs, this function enables the continuous use of the units that are not affected by separately controlling them and isolating other units that have a problem.
Page 590: Machine State Led Setting
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.8.16 Machine State LED Setting A. Use • To set how to display main body statuses on the machine state LED (state display lamp, paper empty lamp). • Each of Type1 and Type2 has the following LED display forms. Machine State LED Setting Type1 Type2...
Page 591: System 2
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.9 System 2 12.9.1 • Not used. 12.9.2 Image Controller Setting A. Use • To set the type of the controller. • [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected. • When setting up the controller. B.
Page 592: Option Board Status
• Use when setting up the optional fax kit (FK-502) or security kit (SC-507) is mounted. • [DSC1], [DSC2] will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines.
Page 593: Unit Change
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.9.5 Unit Change A. Use • To select who is to replace a unit. • Upon setup. • When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit.
Page 594: Software Switch Setting-Setting Items In The Software Switch Setting
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.9.7 Software Switch Setting-Setting items in the software switch setting A. Change the function version of the machine (1) Use • To change the function version of the firmware version. • To use when the firmware is updated from the initial version to the Ver. 4x. HEX Assignment 00 : Operate with the function version 1.
Page 595: Scan Caribration
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE D. Printing on paper of nonstandard size fed from the bypass tray (AnySize mode) (1) Use • To enable printing only by the setting made on the printer driver when printing is attempted on paper of nonstandard size fed by way of the bypass tray (the default setting is the conventional operation).
Page 596: Line Mag Setting
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.9.11 Line Mag Setting • This feature is not available in this machine. 12.9.12 Data Capture A. Use • When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error.
Page 597 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 5. Input the user name and the password. User name: capture Password: sysadm A0P0F3E548DA 6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture. A0P0F3E549DA 7. Using the “binary” command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer. A0P0F3E550DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 598: Split Line Detect. Setting-Prior Detection
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC. A0P0F3E551DA 9. Finish the command prompt. NOTE • After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Settings] [Security Settings] [Security Details], and select [Restrict] for print data capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk.
Page 599: Split Line Detect. Setting-Warning Level
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.9.14 Split Line Detect. Setting-Warning Level A. Use • To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected. • Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines.
Page 600: Network Fax Settings
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.9.17 Network Fax Settings A. Use • To set whether or not to use network fax function. • To use network fax function (IP address fax, internet fax). • Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to “ON” in the following settings.
Page 601: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.9.19 User Paper Settings A. Use • To set and register individual user paper that includes a different basic weight, fusing temperature, 2nd image transfer fine adjustment value. • User Paper Settings is also available from [Administrator Settings] [System Settings] [Expert Adjustment] [User Paper Settings].
Page 602: Coverage Rate Screen
• To customize the BootUp Screen displayed upon machine start-up. • Use this feature when changing the Olivetti logo displayed on the control panel upon start-up to a client company logo or others for client’s intended use of the machine.
Page 603: Install Data
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE B. Procedure 1. Save logo data that conforms to the above specifications in the root directory of a USB memory device. NOTE • Be sure to save data in the root directory as the machine cannot detect data saved in other directories.
Page 604: Bluetooth Settings
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.9.24 Bluetooth Settings • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Use • To set whether to enable or disable the Bluetooth function.
Page 605 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Counter item Counting method Image Transfer belt • Counts how many sheets have been ejected. The counter increases No. of by 1 per every 216 mm in the sub scan direction and shows the total Printed Page count.
Page 606: Service Call Counter
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) New Release • After replacing a fusing unit or transfer belt unit, perform New Release to clear its life counter. 1. Select the key as follows. [Counter] [Life] [New Release]. 2.
Page 607: Maintenance
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.10.6 Maintenance A. Use • To set a count value for maintenance of any given part. • When any given part is replaced. B. Procedure Maint.-Set • Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad. Maint.-Count •...
Page 608: Counter Of Each Mode
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.10.8 Counter of Each Mode A. Use • To display the printed pages in the following specified modes; copy, printer, scanner, and fax. It also displays the count value of using the specified mode. •...
Page 609: Split Line Counter
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.10.13 Split Line Counter A. Use • To display the average number of detected stain on the ADF original glass at the pre- detection. • Used for checking the number of detected stain on the ADF original glass. Pre-detect Large Size : Large-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average number of detected...
Page 610 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 CSRC Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition param- eter no code Stacker Accessory 3,000,000 1 count for each sheet ejection in Plate Movement front 1 staple, rear 1 staple, 2 sta- Monitor ples in sort staple mode as well as shift sort m...
Page 611: Section Jam
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.10.15 Jam A. Use • To count and display how many times jam has been detected on a jam location basis. 12.10.16 Section JAM • To count and display how many times jam has been detected in a certain period, i.e. an interval between service visits, on a jam location basis.
Page 612: Fax Analysis List
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.11.7 Fax Analysis List • For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. 12.12 State Confirmation 12.12.1 Sensor Check A. Use • To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary.
Page 613: Sensor Check Screens
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.12.2 Sensor check screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi- vidual machine. A. Sensor monitor (1) Sensor monitor 1,2 A0P0F3E552DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 614 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Sensor monitor 3,4 A0P0F3E553DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 615 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (3) Sensor monitor 5,6 A0P0F3E554DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 616 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Sensor monitor 7,8 A0P0F3E568DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 617 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (5) Sensor monitor 9,10 A0P0F3E569DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 618 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (6) Sensor monitor 11,12 A0P0F3E570DA Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 619 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (7) Sensor monitor 13 A0P0F3E555DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 620: Sensor Check List
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.12.3 Sensor check list A. Sensor monitor (1) Sensor monitor 1 (Main body) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Paper feed tray 1 Device detection Tray 1 device detection sensor In position Out of position...
Page 621 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name PS27 Near Empty Tray 4 near empty sensor Blocked Unblocked PS26 Paper feed Tray 4 paper feed sensor Paper Paper not present present PS25 Upper Limit...
Page 622 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Sensor monitor 2 (Main body, LCT) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Photo conductor PS43 Charging CL home Charging cleaner home sensor Blocked Unblocked sensor (this side) PS44 Charging CL home Charging cleaner return sensor...
Page 623 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name PS55 Roller retraction Pressure home sensor Retracted Retracted Fuser Power Electricity No electricity restrictions Switch restrictions (3) Sensor monitor 3 (Main body, LCT) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol...
Page 624 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (4) Sensor monitor 4 (FS-526) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Finisher 1 Pass Through Paper Paper not FNS pass sensor FNS Inlet present present Z-Fold Punch Paper Paper not Z-fold Punch regist sensor Regist.
Page 625 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name FNS Front Door PS201 open/Close 24V Door open/close sensor Open Close Detection Side-staple sta- 50 sheets 100 sheets pler cartridge (Blocked) (Unblocked) 2-staple stapler Not at At home...
Page 626 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Center Staple & Center staple alignment motor home Not at PS31 Fold R Alignment At home sensor/R home M HP Center Staple & Center staple alignment motor home Not at PS30...
Page 627 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (8) Sensor monitor 8 (PI-505) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Finisher 5 PI operation panel SW Start/Clear button Post inserter unit manual start/clear SW Punch button Post inserter unit manual punch button Function select Post inserter unit manual function selec- button...
Page 628 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (9) Sensor monitor 9 (ZU-606) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Finisher 6 PSDTB Entrance detection Paper size detect board Paper not Paper L: Paper having present present PS609 Exit detection L: Exit sensor...
Page 629 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name PS601 Sheet detection L: Conveyance sensor Paper not Paper Paper having present present (10) Sensor monitor 10 (FS-527) NOTE • “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and “Tray 2” is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel.
Page 630 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Elevate motor lock Lock Other than Elevate motor detection lock PS21 At lower Not at Elevate Minimum Tray2 lower position sensor limit lower limit Detection position...
Page 631 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (11) Sensor monitor 11 (FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603) NOTE • “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and “Tray 2” is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel. Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Finisher 8...
Page 632 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Saddle Staple At home Not at Home home Saddle staple 1 Staple No staple Empty Saddle staple 2 Staple No staple Empty PS47 Center fold plate M At home...
Page 633: Table Number
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE (13) Sensor monitor 13 (Scanner section of the main body) Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Scanner PS201 Home Sensor Scanner home sensor At home Out of home Org.
Page 634: Level History1
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.12.5 Level History1 A. Use • To display TCR (T/C ratio), IDC/registration sensor output values, and fusing tempera- ture. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. B. Procedure • TCR-C/-M/-Y/-K : Shows the T/C output reading taken last. •...
Page 635: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.12.8 CCD Check A. Use • To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B. • Used for troubleshooting for the CCD sensor. B. Procedure • Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values. CLAMP:The difference between the max.
Page 636: Memory/Hdd Adj.-Compress / Decompression Check
5. The check result will be displayed, [OK] or [NG]. 12.12.12 Memory/HDD Adj.-DSC Bus Check • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Use •...
Page 637: Memory/Hdd Adj.-Hdd R/W Check
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.12.13 Memory/HDD Adj.-HDD R/W Check A. Use • To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed. • When the hard disk is mounted. B.
Page 638: Color Regist
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.12.16 Color Regist A. Use • To check each of C, M, and Y for color shift amount. • The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjustment has been completed.
Page 639: Test Mode
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.13 Test Mode • To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in running mode, as well as the fax trans- mission.
Page 640: Halftone Pattern
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.13.3 Halftone Pattern A. Use • To produce a solid halftone pattern. • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. <Test pattern> SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 128 A0P0F3C519DA B. Procedure •...
Page 641: Lattice Pattern
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.13.4 Lattice Pattern A. Use • To produce a lattice pattern. • Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density. • A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background.
Page 642: Solid Pattern
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.13.5 Solid Pattern A. Use • To produce each of the C, M, Y, and K solid patterns. • Used for checking reproducibility of image density. <Test pattern> SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 A0P0F3C521DA B.
Page 643: Color Solid Pattern
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern A. Use • To produce an 8-color solid pattern. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color. <Test pattern> SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 A0P0F3C523DA B.
Page 644: Running Mode
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.13.9 Running Mode A. Use • To test the printing operation in running mode. • Use to check the printing operation in running mode from each paper source. B. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
Page 645: Original Stop Position
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.14 ADF 12.14.1 Original Stop Position <Use> • To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes. • When the result is Unable in the automatic adjustment of the original stop position. <Procedure>...
Page 646: Registration Loop Adj
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Main Scanning (Front) / Main Scanning (Back) A0P0F3C600DA 1. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 2. Make a full size copy of the chart. NOTE •...
Page 647: Auto Stop Position Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.14.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment A. Use • To automatically adjust the read position for the Sub Scanning Direction. • To check skew feed. • When ADF has been replaced. B. Procedure (1) Sub Scanning Direction 1-SIde 1.
Page 648 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (3) Main Scanning (Front) 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [ADF] [Auto Stop Position Adjustment]. 3. Touch [Main Scanning (Front)]. 4. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 5.
Page 649: Paper Passage
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.14.4 Paper Passage A. Use • To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes. • Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document mis- feed occurs.
Page 650: Sensor Check
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.14.5 Sensor Check A. Use • To check sensors on the paper path. • When a document misfeed occurs. B. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [ADF] [Sensor Check].
Page 651 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name RS201 DF Open Original cover sensor Open Close Paper Paper not Reverse Regist Reverse registration sensor present present (Blocked) (Unblocked) Paper Paper not Before Read Before read sensor present...
Page 652: Original Tray Width
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.14.6 Original Tray Width A. Use • To set the values of maximum (A3 position) and minimum (B6 position) widths on the document width detection variable resistor. • When an original misfeed occurs. •...
Page 653: Read Pos Adj
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.14.7 Read Pos Adj A. Use • To adjust the original read position. • When the first/second carriage, the scanner wire, the scanner assy, the original glass moving unit, and/or the glass step sheet have been replaced. B.
Page 654 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) Read Pos Adj A0P0F3C601DA 1. Place the chart in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 2. Make a full size copy of the chart. Specification B: 0 ±...
Page 655: Feed Zoom
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.14.8 Feed Zoom A. Use • To adjust the feed zoom of ADF in the feeding direction. • When ADF has been replaced. B. Procedure (1) Auto Adjust 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
Page 656: Scanning Light Adjustment
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.14.9 Scanning Light Adjustment A. Use • To adjust the scanning light of ADF. • When the original glass moving unit has been replaced. • Used for adjusting the difference in the scanning lights between scanning from the origi- nal glass and scanning from the ADF original glass.
Page 657: Finisher
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16 Finisher 12.16.1 FS-FN adjustment - Center Staple Position A. Use • Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple func- tion. • Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple func- tion.
Page 658: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Half-Fold Position
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.2 FS-FN adjustment - Half-Fold Position A. Use • Use this adjustment to adjust the half-fold position in half-fold printing. B. Procedure Exit direction A11PF3C502DA 1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF. 2.
Page 659: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Punch Vertical Position
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16.3 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Vertical Position A. Use • Adjusts the vertical position of the punch holes. B. Procedure A11TF3C510DA 1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode. 2. Make an adjustment so that 1/2 of the length A is within the following standard range. Specifications: 2-4 hole: A=80 ±...
Page 660: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Punch Horizontal Position
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.4 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Horizontal Position A. Use • To change the horizontal position of the punch holes. B. Procedure A11TF3C511DA 1. Make a copy sample in the punch mode. 2.
Page 661: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Punch Edge Detection
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16.5 FS-FN adjustment - Punch edge detection A. Use • Adjusts the sensitivity (light intensity) of the PK punch front sensor of the punch kit. • This adjustment is made at the time of setup. B.
Page 662: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Punch Vertical Position (Z-Fold)
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.6 FS-FN adjustment - Punch vertical position (Z-fold) A. Use • To adjust the position of the punch hole in the sub-scanning direction when ZU is in use. • Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606. B.
Page 663: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Punch Horizontal Position (Z-Fold)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16.7 FS-FN adjustment - Punch horizontal position (Z-fold) A. Use • To adjust the position of the punch hole in the main scanning direction when ZU is in use. • Make the adjustment upon setup of ZU-606. B.
Page 664: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Punch Regist Loop Size (Body)
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.9 FS-FN adjustment - Punch Regist Loop Size (Body) A. Use • Adjusts the punch loop size used for paper exited from the main body. • To address problems such as misaligned punch holes, wrinkled paper, and jam at the punch registration section.
Page 665: Fs-Fn Adjustment - 1St Z-Fold Position Fs-Fn Adjustment - 2Nd Z-Fold Position
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16.11 FS-FN adjustment - 1st Z-Fold Position FS-FN adjustment - 2nd Z-Fold Position A. Use • To adjust the positions of the 1st Z-fold and 2nd Z-fold for the Z-fold mode. •...
Page 666: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Tri-Fold Position
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.12 FS-FN adjustment - Tri-Fold Position A. Use • Use this adjustment to adjust tri-fold position in tri-fold printing. B. Procedure A11RF3C500DA 1. Make a copy sample in the tri-folding mode. 2.
Page 667: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Center-Staple Pitch Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16.13 FS-FN adjustment - Center-staple pitch adjustment A. Use • Adjust the interval between two staples in saddle stitching. B. Procedure A11RF3C501DA 1. Place two sheets of originals on the ADF. 2.
Page 668: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.15 FS-FN adjustment - Post Inserter Adjustment A. Use • To make automatic post inserter size detection adjustments separately in each of the upper and lower trays. • Make this adjustment at the time of setup or when the post inserter cannot make proper size detection.
Page 669 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE C. Finisher check list (FS-526/SD-508/PK-516/PI-505/ZU-606) Mode Finisher check1 M1 (1st Transport M) Forward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed M1 (1st Transport M) Backward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed M2 (2nd Transport M) Forward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed M2 (2nd Transport M) Backward Rotation 667mm/s Linear Speed M5/Tray Up/Down M: Move to HP M5/Tray Up/Down M: Move to Lower Limit...
Page 670 12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Mode Finisher check3 M15: Trail Edge Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search Finisher check4 M18: Rewind Paddle Up/Down Movement M: HP Search M16: Rewind Paddle Rotation M: Forward Rotation (Stack) M31/Cent. Staple&Fold Lead. Edge Paddle Rota. M: Fwd Rota. (Stack) M30/Cent.
Page 671: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Load Data
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE D. Finisher check list (FS-527/SD-509) NOTE • “Tray 1” indicates the tray 2 (lower) and “Tray 2” is the tray 1 (upper) shown on the panel. Mode Finisher check1 Stapler Movement Alignment Moving Tray up/down operation FD Stopper Operation...
Page 672: Fs-Fn Adjustment - Side Position Adjustment
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.18 FS-FN adjustment - Side position adjustment A. Use • To fine adjust the horizontal width of the aligning plate. • Use this feature to fine adjust the aligning plate that aligns ejected paper. B.
Page 673: Staple Option Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.16.20 Staple Option Setting A. Use • Specify the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled together. • Only when FS-527 is installed, it is possible to independently set the maximum for each paper type.
Page 674: Fold Power Of Pages Restrict
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.16.22 Fold power of pages restrict A. Use • Imposes restriction on the number of sheets to be folded in each of different folding modes. • This function is available only when SD-508 or ZU-606 is installed. •...
Page 675: Internet Isw Set
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.17 Internet ISW • By using this setting, the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading. • For details for upgrading the firmware, refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance section.
Page 676: Http Setting-Proxy Server
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.17.5 HTTP Setting-Proxy Server A. Use • To set the address and the port number for the proxy server. • To use when accessing the server via proxy server. B. Procedure <Server Address>...
Page 677: Ftp Setting-Connect Proxy
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12. SERVICE MODE 12.17.10 FTP Setting-Connect Proxy A. Use • To set whether or not to access the server via proxy server. B. Procedure • The default setting is OFF. “OFF” 12.17.11 FTP Setting-Proxy Server A.
Page 678: Forwarding Access Setting-Password
12. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 12.17.14 Forwarding Access Setting-Password A. Use • To register the password for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored. B. Procedure 1. Select [Password]. 2. Enter the password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 12.17.15 Forwarding Access Setting-URL A.
Page 679: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13. ENHANCED SECURITY 13. ENHANCED SECURITY 13.1 List of Enhanced Security Service Mode Ref. Page Enhanced Security CE Password P.620 Administrator Password P.620 Administrator Feature Level P.621 CE Authentication P.621 IU Life Stop Setting P.622 NVRAM Data Backup P.622...
Page 680: Enhanced Security
13. ENHANCED SECURITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13.3 Enhanced Security 13.3.1 CE Password A. Use • To set and change the CE password. B. Procedure • Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. • The initial setting is “92729272.” Current Password : Enter the currently using CE password.
Page 681: Administrator Feature Level
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13. ENHANCED SECURITY 13.3.3 Administrator Feature Level A. Use • To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode. • Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode. •...
Page 682: Iu Life Stop Setting
13. ENHANCED SECURITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13.3.5 IU Life Stop Setting A. Use • To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life. B. Procedure • The default setting is Stop. “Stop”...
Page 683: Administrator Unlocking
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13. ENHANCED SECURITY 13.3.8 Administrator unlocking A. Use • To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authentica- tion. • To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password authentication fails and the access lock is activated.
Page 684 13. ENHANCED SECURITY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Details of Each Function (1) New Release Disable mode • To enable a unit that is temporarily used for troubleshooting or other purposes to be used again as a new unit in another machine, New Release Disable mode is provided. •...
Page 685 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 13. ENHANCED SECURITY <3> After finishing work in New Release Disable mode • When continuing to use the new unit used in the New Release Disable mode in the same machine, turn OFF the new Release Disable mode and open and close the lower front door (or turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch) to perform New Release.
Page 686: Billing Setting
14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING 14.1 List of billing setting Service Mode Ref. Page Billing Setting Counter Setting P.627 Management Function Choice P.630 Coverage Rate Clear P.638 License Management Activation Deactivation Repair Initialize Request Code List Function List...
Page 687: Billing Setting
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING 14.3 Billing Setting 14.3.1 Counter Setting A. Use • To set the counting method for the total counter, size counter and long length paper counter. • To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.) •...
Page 688 14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (3) Long Length Paper Counter Mode • When printing on the long paper (457.2 mm or over), the counting value will be the total of the value set by the total counter mode and the value by this setting. •...
Page 689 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING Long Length Banner Counter Total Counter Paper Counter Double Count paper size Count Mode Mode Mode 2 Mode 1 Small size 1 count Large size 2 counts Long size 2 counts Small size 1 count Large size...
Page 690: Management Function Choice
14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14.3.2 Management Function Choice • To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted. Key Counter, Management Device (Data controller), Authentication Device, or Vendor NOTE • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Settings] [Security Setting] [Enhanced Security Mode]...
Page 691: Management Function Choice-Authentication Device 2
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING 14.3.5 Management Function Choice-Authentication Device 2 A. Use • To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed. • Set when the authentication unit (biometric type or card type) is mounted. Card 1 : Uses IC card authentication system (AU-201) Card 2...
Page 692 14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 NOTE • USB memory must be connected with the main power switch/sub power switch off. • When updating the firmware, use the USB port for the service. It cannot be updated when connected to another USB port. 6.
Page 693: Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING 14.3.6 Management Function Choice-Key Counter Only A. Use • To set whether or not the key counter is installed. • Set when the key counter is mounted. • Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the key counter is mounted. ✽...
Page 694: Management Function Choice-Management Device 1
14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14.3.7 Management Function Choice-Management Device 1 A. Use • To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed. B. Procedure NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and account track is set “Off”...
Page 695: Management Function Choice-Vendor 2
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING 14.3.10 Management Function Choice-Vendor 2 A. Use • To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed. NOTE • When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode”...
Page 696: Service Manual
14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 NOTE • Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It needs resetting when cancelling the setting in order to set back to “not mounted”...
Page 697 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 14. BILLING SETTING Setting Item Vendor 2 Authentication Device 1 Authentication Device 2 E-mail RX Setting will be E-mail RX (POP) set to “OFF”. Enabling LDAP will be set LDAP Settings to “OFF”. Prefix/Suffix Prefix/Suffix Setting will be Setting set to “OFF”.
Page 698: Coverage Rate Clear
14. BILLING SETTING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Setting Item Key counter IF Vendor Management Device 1 Management Device 2 Forward TX Setting Password for Memory RX Setting is set to the default Memory RX Setting value of the administrator password PC-Fax RX Setting Restrict...
Page 699: Openapi Authentication Management-Restriction Code
14. BILLING SETTING 14.3.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management-Restriction Code • It will be displayed in d-Color MF651/MF551 machines where the function version is version 2 or later and in all d-Color MF451 machines. A. Use • These are communication settings for the application which is developed by the third vendor.
Page 700: Contents To Be Cleared By Reset Function
15. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 15. CONTENTS TO BE CLEARED BY RESET FUNCTION Function for clearing Initialize Clear All Data Contents to be cleared Jam display Rank A Malfunction Rank B display Rank C Erratic operation / display...
Page 701: Mechanical Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 16.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 16.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner motor assy has been removed. •...
Page 702: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound 1. Move the mirror unit [1] to the center and push it against the notches [2] on the rail.
Page 703: Scanner Position Adjustment
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 16.1.3 Scanner position adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound. • Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit must be completed. 1.
Page 704: Adjusting The Height Of The Original Glass Moving Unit
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When replacing the original glass moving unit. 1. Set the height adjustment jig for the original glass moving unit [1].
Page 705 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 5. Remove four screws [1] from the original glass moving unit. A0P0F2C052DA 6. Install four spacers [1] and make a height adjustment. A0P0F3C558DA NOTE • Prepare and use the spacers described below as necessary. A00J 2903 ##: 0.5 mm thickness A00J 2908 ##: 0.2 mm thickness A00J 2909 ##: 0.1 mm thickness...
Page 706: 16.1.5 Adjusting The Height Of The Guide Support For The Original Glass Moving Unit
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 7. Temporarily secure the original glass moving unit [2] with four screws [1]. 8. Check the height repeating step 1 to 9. Secure the original glass moving unit with four screws [1]. A0P0F3C564DA 16.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit...
Page 707: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Paper Feed Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 16.2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section 16.2.1 Tray3/4 paper size change This adjustment must be made in the following case: • Upon user requests, the paper size used for the tray3/4 needs to be changed. 1.
Page 708: Skew Adjustment Of The Tray 1/2
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 5. Insert paper of the size to be placed in the tray, and set the paper guide plate (front) against the edge of the paper. Gap between paper and the paper guide plate (front):0 < 1mm 6.
Page 709: Centering Adjustment Of The Tray 1/2
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 16.2.3 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When an image printed on a copy is displaced from the correct position with the use of the tray1/2.
Page 710: Centering Adjustment Of The Tray 3/4
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16.2.4 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem. [Service Mode] [Machine] [Centering] 1.
Page 711: Pick-Up Roller Load Adjustment Of The Tray 3/4
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 16.2.5 Pick-up roller load adjustment of the tray 3/4 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • In case a no feed jam occurs frequently. 1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made. 2.
Page 712: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Bypass Tray Section
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 16.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The bypass paper size unit has been removed. 1.
Page 713 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 3. Install the bypass unit cover so that part A (edge) [1] of the rack gear for the bypass paper size unit and part B [2] of the bypass unit cover are aligned in a straight line.
Page 714: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Main Drive Unit Section
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16.4 Mechanical adjustment of the main drive unit section 16.4.1 PC drive gear positioning adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When the color PC drum motor was removed. See P.166 •...
Page 715 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT 3. Mount the color PC drum motor [1] while two hole positions are well set. A00JF2C455DA Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 716 16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Blank Page Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 717: Jam Display
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY TROUBLESHOOTING 17. JAM DISPLAY • When the paper jam occurred, the message, the position jam occurred (number blinks), position of the remaining paper (number lights up), and the JAM code are displayed. NOTE •...
Page 718 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 10-10 Manual bypass • The bypass paper limit sensor (PS35) is Manual bypass tray P.679 feed section not blocked after the lapse of a predeter- door mined period of time after the paper lifting plate is started to be raised from the...
Page 719 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 13-01 Tray 3 feed • The leading edge of the paper does not Tray 3/4 horizontal P.681 section block the tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) transport unit even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 3 starts to feed paper.
Page 720 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 17-09 Tray 3/4 • The tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is not Tray 3/4 horizontal P.682 horizontal unblocked even after the lapse of a given transport unit transport period of time after the paper has blocked...
Page 721 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 20-01 Vertical trans- • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not Manual bypass tray P.684 port section unblocked even after the lapse of a given door, period of time after the paper has turned Lower right door...
Page 722 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 30-01 2nd image • A sheet of paper does not block the timing Upper right door P.684 transfer roller sensor (PS38) after a predetermined section period of time has elapsed since the sheet unblocks PS38.
Page 723 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 66-02 ADF paper • The after separate sensor (PS4) is not Transportation cover P.686 feed section turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the take-up motor (M2) is turned ON.
Page 724 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 72-11 FS transport • The Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) is Front door P.688 section not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the FNS pass sen- sor (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.
Page 725 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 72-18 FS transport <When FS-526 is installed> Front door P.691 section • The 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) is turned ON by the paper.
Page 726 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 72-21 FS exit section <When FS-526 is installed> Front door P.692 • The 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15) is not turn OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the start of exiting paper.
Page 727 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 72-38 ZU section • None of the leading, trailing, or side edge Front door P.695 sensor on the paper size detect board (PSDTB) is turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper pass sensor (PS202) in the horizontal...
Page 728 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 72-47 ZU section • Paper remains in the Z-fold unit even after Front door, Z folding/ P.698 the set period of time has elapsed after conveyance unit MFP sends a processing stop signal to the Z-fold unit.
Page 729 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 72-84 SD staple • Stapler home sensor (PS33) does not turn Front door, stacker P.702 section ON even after the set period of time has unit elapsed after the center-staple operation started.
Page 730: Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Misfeed processing Ref. JAM type Detection timing code location page 92-01 Duplex • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not Upper right door, P.705 pre-registra- unblocked even after the lapse of a given Duplex door tion section period of time after a duplex paper feed...
Page 731: Sensor Layout
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.2 Sensor layout 17.2.1 Main body [10] [12] [11] A0P0F4C504DA Paper exit sensor PS39 Tray 2 vertical transport sensor PS12 ADU paper passage sensor/1 PS47 Tray2 paper feed sensor PS13 [3]*1 Timing roller sensor PS38 Intermediate roller sensor PS28...
Page 732 17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.2.2 A0P0F4C600DA Exit sensor (PS5) Registration sensor (PS3) Reverse registration sensor (PS8) After separate sensor (PS4) Before read sensor (PS9) Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 733: Lu-204/Lu-301
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.2.3 LU-204/LU-301 A0TJF4C500DA [1] Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Paper feed sensor (PS3) Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 734: Js-504
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.2.4 JS-504 A083F4C501DA Paper exit sensor (PS39) Upper tray exit sensor (PS2) Lower tray exit sensor (PS1) Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 735: Zu-606
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.2.5 ZU-606 A109F4C500DA [1] Paper size detect board (PSDTB) Exit sensor (PS609) [2] Paper pass sensor (PS202) Conveyance sensor (PS601) Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 736: Fs-526/Sd-508/Pk-516
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.2.6 FS-526/SD-508/PK-516 A11PF4C500DA Paper pass sensor (PS202) SD exit sensor/PR (PS29) Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2) 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) PK punch home sensor (PS301) 2 staples stacker empty sensor (PS15) FNS pass sensor (PS1) Sub tray exit sensor (PS8) Service Manual...
Page 737: Js-602
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.2.7 JS-602 A10CF4C500DA [1] Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) 17.2.8 PI-505 A10AF4C500DA [1] Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) FNS pass sensor (PS1) [2] Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 738: Fs-527/Sd-509/Pk-517/Js-603
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.2.9 FS-527/SD-509/PK-517/JS-603 [10] A0HRF4C500DA Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) Paper detection sensor/2 (PS44) Registration sensor (PS10) lower path sensor (PS9) Tray2 path sensor (PS6) Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16) Saddle path sensor (PS11) [10]...
Page 739: Solution
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3 Solution 17.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.
Page 740: Misfeed At Tray 1 Feed Section
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.3 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section Relevant parts Take-up motor (M22) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...
Page 741: Misfeed At Tray 3 Feed Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.5 Misfeed at tray 3 feed section Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...
Page 742: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.7 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) Printer control board (PRCB) Horizontal transport clutch (CL3) Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) WIRING DIAGRAM...
Page 743: Lct Feed Section
Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — LU-204/LU-301 PS3 I/O check, sensor check LUDB CN5-8 (ON) d-Color MF651/551 PS12 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN10<B>-2 (ON) Change LUDB — — PFTDB ICP1 conduction check — —...
Page 744: Misfeed At Vertical Transport Section
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.11 Misfeed at vertical transport section Relevant parts Tray 1 vertical transport motor (M5) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7) Printer control board (PRCB) Vertical transport motor (M26) Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
Page 745: Misfeed At Exit Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.13 Misfeed at exit section Relevant parts Exit motor (M4) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Fusing motor (M30) Printer control board (PRCB) Switchback motor (M33) Gate switch solenoid (SD1) Paper exit sensor (PS39) ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...
Page 746: Adf Paper Feed Section
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.15 ADF paper feed section Relevant parts Take-up motor (M2) DF control board (DFCB) After separate sensor (PS4) Length sensor/1 (PS10) Length sensor/2 (PS11) Length sensor/3 (PS12) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)
Page 747: Adf Paper Exit Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.17 ADF paper exit section Relevant parts Exit motor (M3) DF control board (DFCB) Before read sensor (PS9) Exit sensor (PS5) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 748: Code: 72-11
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.19 Code: 72-11 Relevant parts FNS pass sensor (PS1) FS control board (FSCB) Z-fold Punch regist sensor (PS2) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 749: Code: 72-15
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY (2) When FS-527 is installed Relevant parts Lower path sensor (PS9) FS control board (FSCB) Saddle path sensor (PS11) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 750: Code: 72-16
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — d-Color MF651/ PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) 551/451 Q-5 PS1 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN10-2 (ON) FS-526 D-8 Change FSCB —...
Page 751: Code: 72-18
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY (2) When FS-527 is installed Relevant parts Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1) FS control board (FSCB) Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 752: Code: 72-19
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.26 Code: 72-19 (1) When FS-526 is installed Relevant parts Stacker entrance motor (M10) FS control board (FSCB) 2 staples stacker sensor (PS3) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 753: Code: 72-22
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY (2) When FS-527 is installed Relevant parts lower path sensor (PS9) FS control board (FSCB) Tray1 paper detection sensor (PS16) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 754: Code: 72-23
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.29 Code: 72-23 Relevant parts Sub tray exit sensor (PS8) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — PS8 I/O check, sensor check FSCB CN21<B>-3 (ON) FS-526 L-8 Change FSCB...
Page 755: Code: 72-31 / 72-34
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.31 Code: 72-31 / 72-34 Relevant parts Job tray paper exit sensor (PS402) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — —...
Page 756: Code: 72-39
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.34 Code: 72-39 Relevant parts Paper size detect board (PSDTB) ZU control board (ZUCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — ZU-606 PSDTB I/O check, sensor check ZUCB CN2-1 to 10 C to D-9 to 10 Change ZUCB...
Page 757: Code: 72-43
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.37 Code: 72-43 (1) When FS-526+PK-516 is installed Relevant parts Punch drive motor (M301) Punch control board (PKDB) PK punch home sensor (PS301) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)
Page 758: Code: 72-45
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.39 Code: 72-45 Relevant parts Paper pass sensor (PS202) ZU control board (ZUCB) Exit sensor (PS609) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 Q-2 to 3...
Page 759: Code: 72-49
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.42 Code: 72-49 Relevant parts Transfer clutch /Up (CL201) PI drive board (PIDB) Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 760: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.45 Code: 72-60 Relevant parts Punch clutch (CL601) Paper size detect board (PSDTB) Punch home sensor (PS606) ZU control board (ZUCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 761: Code: 72-64
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.48 Code: 72-64 Relevant parts Main motor (M606) ZU control board (ZUCB) Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — M606 operation check ZUCB CN8-1 to 6 ZU-606 C-2...
Page 762: Code: 72-84
17. JAM DISPLAY Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17.3.50 Code: 72-84 Relevant parts Center staple motor (M23) SD drive board (SDDB) Stapler home sensor (PS33) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 763: Code: 72-86
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.52 Code: 72-86 Relevant parts Saddle path sensor (PS11) SD drive board (SDDB) Paper detection sensor/1 (PS43) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items —...
Page 764: Code: 75-42
WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Initial check items — — d-Color MF651/551 PS39 I/O check, sensor check PFTDB CN4-12 (ON) PS202 I/O check, sensor check TRCB CN206-2 (ON) FS-526 P to Q-2 Change TRCB — —...
Page 765: Misfeed At Duplex Pre-Registration Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 17. JAM DISPLAY 17.3.57 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section Relevant parts ADU transport motor/1 (M31) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) ADU transport motor/2 (M32) Printer control board (PRCB) Timing roller sensor (PS38) OHP detection sensor (PS40) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...
Page 766: Malfunction Code
18. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. MALFUNCTION CODE 18.1 Display procedure • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding warning code and maintenance call mark on the control panel. •...
Page 767: List
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. MALFUNCTION CODE 18.2 List • If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears. Code Item Description CCD gain adjustment failure • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.
Page 768 18. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Code Item Description P-18 PC charge cleaning trouble 1 • Charging cleaner return sensor is not interrupted even after the specified time has passed when the wire cleaning material is moving forward. * Under the situation above occurs, control will be switched to the return operation after the warning is given.
Page 769 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. MALFUNCTION CODE Code Item Description Imaging unit/C accumulated • PC drum rotation time count value used for the life rotation time excess warning judgment of imaging units (the value for PC drum rota- tion distance calculated into the rotation time) is above Imaging unit/M accumulated the threshold value for the excess warning (5,180 M).
Page 770: Solution
18. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18.3 Solution 18.3.1 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Exposure unit CCD board (CCDB) MFP board (MFPB) Step Action Correct the harness connection between CCDB and MFPB if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Clean the lens, mirrors, CCD surface, and shading sheet if dirty.
Page 771: P-5: Idc Sensor (Front) Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. MALFUNCTION CODE 18.3.4 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure 18.3.5 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) Printer control board (PRCB) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) High voltage unit/1 (HV1) Transfer belt unit Step Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.
Page 772: P-14: Skew Correction Trouble
18. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18.3.10 P-14: Skew correction trouble Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) PH relay board (REYB/PH) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Printer control board (PRCB) Imaging unit PH unit Step Action Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary. Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty.
Page 773: P-21: Color Regist Test Pattern Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18. MALFUNCTION CODE 18.3.13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure Relevant parts Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB) PH unit Step Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty. Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.
Page 774: P-31: Pc Home Sensor (K) Malfunction
18. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 18.3.16 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction Relevant parts K PC encoder sensor/1 (PC45) Transport drive assy K PC encoder sensor/2 (PC46) Printer control board (PRCB) Step Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure. *1 Check the sensor, for which a faulty condition has been checked, for installed position and proper connector connection.
Page 775: Trouble Code
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.1 Display procedure • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the control panel. A0P0F4E514DA 19.2 Trouble resetting procedure •...
Page 776: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.3 Trouble isolation function • The trouble isolation function enables you to control MFP temporarily isolating faulty units and options where the trouble isolation function can be applied when trouble occurs. This allows you to continue using the other units that are not affected and reduce down time that continues until CE resolves the problem.
Page 777 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C0301 Suction fan motor’s fail- • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a pre- ure to turn determined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.
Page 778 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C1106 Side-staple stapler drive <When FS-526 is installed> Staple malfunction • The stapler position sensor/1/2/3/4 (PS50/ PS/51/PS52/PS53) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 2 staples stapler move- ment motor (M13) is turned ON.
Page 779 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C1115 Center-staple knife drive <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ motor malfunction • The center fold knife home sensor (PS34) is Tri-Fold not turned ON even after the set period of Center time has elapsed while the center fold knife Stapling...
Page 780 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C1132 Output OP punch driving <When FS-526+PK-516 is installed> Punch motor malfunction • The PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed while the punch oscillating motor (M302) is energized.
Page 781 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C1144 Spare stacker board drive <When FS-526 is installed> motor malfunction • The stacker plate home sensor (PS11) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed while the stacker plate motor (M17) is energized.
Page 782 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C1156 Center-staple paddle <When FS-526+SD-508 is installed> Half-Fold/ roller motor malfunction • The center staple paddle/T (M29) lock sig- Tri-Fold (trailing edge) nal remains set to L for a set period of time Center while the center staple paddle/T (M29) is Stapling...
Page 783 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C1190 Alignment plate motor <When FS-527 is installed> drive malfunction • The alignment plate home sensor (PS17) is turned neither ON nor OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the alignment plate motor (M13) is turned ON.
Page 784 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C11B5 Saddle stapler drive mal- <When FS-527+SD-509 is installed> Half-Fold/ function • The center stapler home sensor is turned Tri-Fold neither ON nor OFF even after the set Center period of time has elapsed after the center Stapling...
Page 785 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C2151 Secondary transfer roller • The pressure welding alienation sensor pressure welding alien- doesn’t turn OFF (retracting) even after the ation lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is retracting.
Page 786 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C2160 PC charge (C) • When electrostatic charge output is ON, malfunction electrostatic charge leak detection system continues to detect leaks for a predeter- C2161 PC charge (M) mined period of time.
Page 787 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C2354 Rear side cooling fan • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a motor’s failure to turn predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.
Page 788 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C2559 Cyan TCR sensor • TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not adjustment failure function properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value. C255A Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure C255B Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure...
Page 789 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C3102 Fusing roller failure to turn • When the IH power supply is turned ON, pulse signals are not input either of the heating roller rotation sensor within a prede- termined period of time.
Page 790 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C3822 Fusing abnormally low • The heating roller thermistor/2 continues to temperature detection detect a temperature lower than a predeter- (Edge of the heating mined one for a predetermined period of roller) time.
Page 791 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C3B05 IH temperature sensor • While the IH heater was on, IH temperature defect sensor was disconnected for more than the predetermined period of time. •...
Page 792 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C4301 PH cooling fan motor • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.
Page 793 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C6102 Drive system home • The scanner home sensor is unable to Scanner sensor malfunction detect the scanner located at its home posi- tion.
Page 794 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation C6F08 Reserved C6F09 Reserved C6F0A Reserved C6FDC Reserved C8101 Before reading pressure • During a pressure motion being performed, welding alienation the read roller sensor (PS6) output does not mechanism change from H to L.
Page 795 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CA053 Controller start failure • A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface. CB001 FAX board error 1 See the FK-502 Service Manual. CB002 FAX board error 2 CB003 FAX board error 3 CB051 FAX board mount failure...
Page 796 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CB128 Timeout error due to non- See the FK-502 Service Manual. response from LINE dur- ing suspension process CB129 Timeout error due to non- response from file system/ file driver during suspension process...
Page 797 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CB152 Line control: Doc access See the FK-502 Service Manual. error (Report buf access error) CB153 Line control: Response wait timeout from external task CB154 Line control: Internal que table control error...
Page 798 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CB176 Page control: Unable to See the FK-502 Service Manual. check TTI domain CB177 Page control: Error return from TTI rasterizer CB178 Page control: Receiving job generation error CB185 Page control: Receiving data size logic error...
Page 799 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) • The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine is being checked. CC164 ROM contents error •...
Page 800 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CD041 HDD command execution • The error occurred inside the hard disk. error CD042 Address Mark Not Found CD043 CD044 CD045 CD046 CD047 HDD SCSI library error •...
Page 801 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing Rank lation CD272 i-Option activated and • While the i-Option is activated, the addi- additional memory and tional memory included in UK-203 and the HDD not installed HDD are not installed.
Page 802 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 • The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. • When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
Page 803 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF520 Framing error Communication error • MFP board (MFPB) (IR detected) CF530 Parity error + Framing error CF540 Overrun error CF550 Parity error + Overrun error CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error...
Page 804 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF802 SIO sending port...ENG • MFP board (MFPB)/ Engine CF806 SIO sending port...IRC • MFP board (MFPB) CF807 SIO sending port...ADF CF806 Unsupported option trouble CF807 CF812 SIO sending port...Fiery...
Page 805 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 • MFP board (MFPB) CFB05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05 CFB06 ASIC200 first sheet DMA06 CFB07 ASIC200 first sheet DMA07 CFB08 ASIC200 first sheet DMA08 CFB09 ASIC200 first sheet DMA09 CFB0A ASIC200 first sheet DMA10...
Page 806 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB2D ASIC200 second sheet DMA13 • MFP board (MFPB) CFB2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 CFB2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 CFB30 ASIC200 second sheet DMA16 CFB31 ASIC200 second sheet DMA17 CFB32 ASIC200 second sheet DMA18 CFB33 ASIC200 second sheet DMA19...
Page 807 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB56 ASIC200 third sheet DMA22 • MFP board (MFPB) CFB57 ASIC200 third sheet DMA23 CFB58 ASIC200 third sheet DMA24 CFB59 ASIC200 third sheet DMA25 CFB5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 CFB5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 CFB5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28...
Page 808 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC15 ASIC200 first sheet DMA21 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) CFC16 ASIC200 first sheet DMA22 error interruption CFC17 ASIC200 first sheet DMA23 error interruption CFC18 ASIC200 first sheet DMA24 error interruption CFC19 ASIC200 first sheet DMA25 error interruption CFC1A ASIC200 first sheet DMA26 error interruption...
Page 809 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC33 ASIC200 second sheet DMA03 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) CFC34 ASIC200 second sheet DMA04 error interruption CFC35 ASIC200 second sheet DMA05 error interruption CFC36 ASIC200 second sheet DMA06 error interruption CFC37 ASIC200 second sheet DMA07 error interruption CFC38 ASIC200 second sheet DMA08 error interruption...
Page 810 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options ASIC200 second sheet SDC slave had illegal access • MFP board (MFPB) CFC56 error ASIC200 second sheet memory master access had CFC57 Completer Abort ASIC200 second sheet memory master access had CFC58...
Page 811 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC79 ASIC200 third sheet DMA25 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) CFC7A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 error interruption CFC7B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 error interruption CFC7C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 error interruption CFC7D ASIC200 third sheet DMA29 error interruption CFC7E ASIC200 third sheet DMA30 error interruption...
Page 812 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFD00 ASIC200 first sheet DMA00 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFD01 ASIC200 first sheet DMA01 time out CFD02 ASIC200 first sheet DMA02 time out CFD03 ASIC200 first sheet DMA03 time out CFD04 ASIC200 first sheet DMA04 time out CFD05 ASIC200 first sheet DMA05 time out...
Page 813 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFD2E ASIC200 second sheet DMA14 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFD2F ASIC200 second sheet DMA15 time out CFD30 ASIC200 second sheet DMA16 time out CFD31 ASIC200 second sheet DMA17 time out CFD32 ASIC200 second sheet DMA18 time out CFD33 ASIC200 second sheet DMA19 time out...
Page 814 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFD57 ASIC200 third sheet DMA23 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFD58 ASIC200 third sheet DMA24 time out CFD59 ASIC200 third sheet DMA25 time out CFD5A ASIC200 third sheet DMA26 time out CFD5B ASIC200 third sheet DMA27 time out CFD5C ASIC200 third sheet DMA28 time out...
Page 815 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFE1D ASIC200 first sheet DMA29 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFE1E ASIC200 first sheet DMA30 time out CFE1F ASIC200 first sheet DMA31 time out CFE20 ASIC200 second sheet DMA00 time out CFE21 ASIC200 second sheet DMA01 time out CFE22 ASIC200 second sheet DMA02 time out...
Page 816 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFE46 ASIC200 third sheet DMA06 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFE47 ASIC200 third sheet DMA07 time out CFE48 ASIC200 third sheet DMA08 time out CFE49 ASIC200 third sheet DMA09 time out CFE4A ASIC200 third sheet DMA10 time out CFE4B ASIC200 third sheet DMA11 time out...
Page 817 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFF0F ASIC200 first sheet DMA15 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFF10 ASIC200 first sheet DMA16 time out CFF11 ASIC200 first sheet DMA17 time out CFF12 ASIC200 first sheet DMA18 time out CFF13 ASIC200 first sheet DMA19 time out CFF14 ASIC200 first sheet DMA20 time out...
Page 818 19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFF38 ASIC200 second sheet DMA24 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFF39 ASIC200 second sheet DMA25 time out CFF3A ASIC200 second sheet DMA26 time out CFF3B ASIC200 second sheet DMA27 time out CFF3C ASIC200 second sheet DMA28 time out CFF3D ASIC200 second sheet DMA29 time out...
Page 819: Solution
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5 Solution 19.5.1 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn 19.5.2 C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...
Page 820: C0204: Tray 2 Feeder Up/Down Abnormality
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.4 C0204: Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS14) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 2 lift-up motor (M8) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
Page 821: C0208: Tray 4 Feeder Up/Down Abnormality
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.6 C0208: Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 4 upper limit sensor (PS27) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Tray 4 lift-up motor (M24) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
Page 822: C0301: Suction Fan Motor's Failure To Turn
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.8 C0301: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Suction fan motor (FM1) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM1 connector for proper con- —...
Page 823: C1003: Pk Communication Error
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.10 C1003: PK communication error Relevant parts Punch control board (PKDB) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Disconnect and then connect the power —...
Page 824: C1081: Sd Communication Error
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.13 C1081: SD communication error Relevant parts SD drive board (SDDB) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Disconnect and then connect the power cord.
Page 825: C1103: Side-Staple Front Adjust Drive Motor Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.15 C1103: Side-staple front adjust drive motor malfunction Relevant parts Alignment plate motor/F (M11) FS control board (FSCB) 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F (PS17) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 826: C1105: Paper Exit Auxiliary Roller Motor Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.17 C1105: Paper exit auxiliary roller motor malfunction Relevant parts Paper output roller motor (M6) FS control board (FSCB) Paper output roller home sensor (PS10) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 827: C1109: Side-Staple Stapler Motor Drive Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.19 C1109: Side-staple stapler motor drive malfunction Relevant parts 2 staples stapler motor (M14) FS control board (FSCB) Stapler unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 828: C1112: Center-Staple Clinch Roller Motor Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.21 C1112: Center-staple clinch roller motor malfunction Relevant parts Clincher motor (M25) SD drive board (SDDB) Stapler home sensor (PS33) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces-...
Page 829: C1114: Center-Staple Front Adjust Drive Motor Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE (2) When FS-527+SD-509 is installed Relevant parts Leading edge stopper motor (M20) SD drive board (SDDB) Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 830: C1115: Center-Staple Knife Drive Motor Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) When FS-527+SD-509 is installed Relevant parts Center staple alignment motor/F (M24) SD drive board (SDDB) Center staple alignment home sensor/F (PS42) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 831: C1116: Center-Staple Transfer Motor Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE (2) When FS-527+SD-509 is installed Relevant parts Center fold plate motor (M26) SD drive board (SDDB) Center fold plate home sensor (PS47) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 832: C1124: Sheet Feeder Up/Down Drive Failure (Lower)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 (2) When FS-527+SD-509 is installed Relevant parts Center fold roller motor (M25) SD drive board (SDDB) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 833: C1125: Sheet Feeder Up/Down Drive Failure (Upper)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.27 C1125: Sheet feeder up/down drive failure (upper) Relevant parts Tray lift motor /Up (M201) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) FS control board (FSCB) Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...
Page 834: C1130: 1St Stopper Motor Drive Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.29 C1130: 1st stopper motor drive malfunction Relevant parts 1st stopper motor (M602) ZU control board (ZUCB) 1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces-...
Page 835: C1132: Output Op Punch Driving Motor Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.31 C1132: Output OP punch driving motor malfunction Relevant parts Punch oscillating motor (M302) Punch control board (PKDB) PK punch oscillating home sensor (PS303) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal...
Page 836: C1134: Main Motor Cooling Fan Drive Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.33 C1134: Main motor cooling fan drive malfunction Relevant parts Main motor cooling fan (FM601) ZU control board (ZUCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor connectors for proper —...
Page 837: C1136: Punch Switchover Motor Drive Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.35 C1136: Punch switchover motor drive malfunction Relevant parts Punch switchover motor (M608) ZU control board (ZUCB) Punch switchover switch (MS601) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 838: C1141: Side-Staple Paddle Roller Motor Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.37 C1141: Side-staple paddle roller motor malfunction Relevant parts Paddle motor (M16) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 839: C1143: Side-Staple Rewinding Paddle Up-Down Motor Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.39 C1143: Side-staple rewinding paddle up-down motor malfunction Relevant parts Rewind paddle motor (M18) FS control board (FSCB) Rewind paddle home sensor (PS16) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces-...
Page 840: C1145: End Stopper Drive Motor Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.41 C1145: End stopper drive motor malfunction Relevant parts 2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19) FS control board (FSCB) 2 staples trail edge stopper home sensor (PS22) 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/1 (PS23) 2 staples trail edge stopper standby sensor/2 (PS42)
Page 841: C1151: Center-Staple Stapler Drive Motor Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE (2) When FS-527+SD-509 is installed Relevant parts Center staple alignment motor/R (M23) SD drive board (SDDB) Center staple alignment home sensor/R (PS41) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 842: C1152: Center-Staple Paper Exit Motor Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.44 C1152: Center-staple paper exit motor malfunction Relevant parts Exit motor (M34) SD drive board (SDDB) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 843: C1156: Center-Staple Paddle Roller Motor Malfunction (Trailing Edge)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.46 C1156: Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (trailing edge) (1) When FS-526+SD-508 is installed Relevant parts Center staple paddle/T (M29) SD drive board (SDDB) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal...
Page 844: C1157: Center-Staple Paddle Roller Motor Malfunction (Middle)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.47 C1157: Center-staple paddle roller motor malfunction (middle) Relevant parts Center staple paddle/C (M30) SD drive board (SDDB) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 845: C1183: Elevate Drive Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE (2) When FS-527 is installed Relevant parts Tray2 shift motor (M16) FS control board (FSCB) Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 846: C1190: Alignment Plate Motor Drive Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.50 C1190: Alignment plate motor drive malfunction Relevant parts Alignment plate motor (M13) FS control board (FSCB) Alignment plate home sensor (PS17) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 847: C11A1: Tray 2 Exit Roller Pressure/ Retraction Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.52 C11A1: Tray 2 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction Relevant parts Exit roller retraction motor (M9) FS control board (FSCB) Exit roller pressure sensor (PS12) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 848: C11A7: Tray 3 Exit Roller Pressure/ Retraction Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.54 C11A7: Tray 3 exit roller pressure/ retraction malfunction Relevant parts Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) FS control board (FSCB) Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)
Page 849: C11B2: Staple Drive Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.56 C11B2: Staple drive malfunction Relevant parts Stapler unit FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 850: C11C0: Punch Motor Drive Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.58 C11C0: Punch motor drive malfunction Relevant parts Punch motor/1 (M100) FS control board (FSCB) Punch home sensor/1 (PS100) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 851: C11E1: Upper Lower Path Switching Motor Drive Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE (2) When JS-504 is installed Relevant parts Route change motor (M3) JS control board (JSCB) Route change home sensor (PS4) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
Page 852: C11E2: Tray1 Path Switching Motor Drive Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.61 C11E2: Tray1 path switching motor drive malfunction Relevant parts Tray1 path switching motor (M8) FS control board (FSCB) Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...
Page 853: C2151: Secondary Transfer Roller Pressure Welding Alienation
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.63 C2151: Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation Relevant parts Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50) Printer control board (PRCB) 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M3 connector for proper...
Page 854: C2160: Pc Charge (C) Malfunction
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.65 C2160: PC charge (C) malfunction 19.5.66 C2161: PC charge (M) malfunction 19.5.67 C2162: PC charge (Y) malfunction 19.5.68 C2163: PC charge (K) malfunction 19.5.69 C2164: PC charge malfunction Relevant parts Imaging unit High voltage unit/1 (HV1) Printer control board (PRCB)
Page 855: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.71 C2253: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn 19.5.72 C2254: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Color PC drum motor (M16) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
Page 856: C2257: Cleaner Motor's Failure To Turn
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.75 C2257: Cleaner motor’s failure to turn 19.5.76 C2258: Cleaner motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Cleaner motor (M38) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M38 connector for proper —...
Page 857: C225B: K Pc Drum Motor's Failure To Turn
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.79 C225B: K PC drum motor’s failure to turn 19.5.80 C225C: K PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts K PC drum motor (M18) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
Page 858: C2353: Iu Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.82 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts IU cooling fan motor (FM15) PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM15 connector for proper —...
Page 859: C2551: Abnormally Low Toner Density Detected Cyan Tcr Sensor
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.84 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor 19.5.85 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor 19.5.86 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Toner supply motor/Y (M9) Imaging unit /M...
Page 860: C2552: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Cyan Tcr Sensor
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.87 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor 19.5.88 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor 19.5.89 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Sub hopper unit Imaging unit /M...
Page 861: C2558: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Black Tcr Sensor
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.91 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor Relevant parts Drum unit /K Sub hopper unit Toner cartridge /K Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Reinstall drum unit/K...
Page 862: C2561: Cyan Tcr Sensor Failure
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.96 C2561: Cyan TCR sensor failure 19.5.97 C2562: Magenta TCR sensor failure 19.5.98 C2563: Yellow TCR sensor failure 19.5.99 C2564: Black TCR sensor failure Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Printer control board (PRCB) Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y Drum unit /K...
Page 863: C2650: Main Backup Media Access Error
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.100 C2650: Main backup media access error Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector (CN33) on PRCB, the —...
Page 864: C2651: Eeprom Access Error (Imaging Unit/C)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.101 C2651: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/C) 19.5.102 C2652: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/M) 19.5.103 C2653: EEPROM access error (Imaging unit/Y) 19.5.104 C2654: EEPROM access error (Drum unit/K) Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Printer control board (PRCB) Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y...
Page 865: C3101: Fusing Roller Separation Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.110 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure Relevant parts Roller pressure welding alienation sensor (PS55) Printer control board (PRCB) Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) Fusing unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M29 connector for proper...
Page 866: C3201: Fusing Motor Failure To Turn
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.112 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn 19.5.113 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Fusing motor (M30) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M30 connector for proper —...
Page 867: C3304: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/ 2 Failure To Turn
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.115 C3304: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 2 failure to turn Relevant parts Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (FM4) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM4 connector for proper —...
Page 868: C3424: Fusing Heaters Trouble (Soaking Side)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.117 C3424: Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the fusing unit for correct installation —...
Page 869: C3725: Fusing Abnormally High Temperature Detection (Nc Sensor)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.119 C3721: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Center of the heating roller) 19.5.120 C3722: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) 19.5.121 C3725: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU)
Page 870: C3825: Fusing Abnormally Low Temperature Detection (Nc Sensor)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.123 C3822: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) 19.5.124 C3825: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...
Page 871: C3922: Fusing Sensor Wire Breaks Detection (Edge Of The Heating Roller)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.126 C3921: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the heating roller) 19.5.127 C3922: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the heating roller) 19.5.128 C3925: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU)
Page 872: C392A: Fusing Sensor Contamination (Nc Sensor)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.130 C392A: Fusing sensor contamination (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS1) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal...
Page 873: C3B02: Ih Malfunction (Cpu)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.131 C3B02: IH malfunction (CPU) 19.5.132 C3B03: IH malfunction (monitor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) IH coil unit Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
Page 874: C4101: Polygon Motor Rotation Trouble
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.137 C4101: Polygon motor rotation trouble Relevant parts PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector for proper connection —...
Page 875: C4501: Laser Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.139 C4501: Laser malfunction Relevant parts PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector for proper connection —...
Page 876: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.142 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant parts IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM10 connector for proper —...
Page 877: C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1'S Failure To Turn
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.144 C5351: Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant parts Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (FM9) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM9 connector for proper...
Page 878: C5356: Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.146 C5356: Cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Cooling fan motor (FM3) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM3 connector for proper —...
Page 879: C5372: Mfp Control Board Cpu Temperature Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.148 C5372: MFP control board CPU temperature failure Relevant parts CPU cooling fan motor MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Reboot the machine. — —...
Page 880: C6301: Optical Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.151 C6301: Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Optical cooling fan motor (M202) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM201 connector for proper —...
Page 881: C6751: Ccd Clamp/Gain Adjustment Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.153 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Exposure unit CCD board (CCDB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Correct the harness connection between —...
Page 882: C6901: Dsc Board Mount Failure 1
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.156 C6901: DSC board mount failure 1 19.5.157 C6902: DSC board bus check NG1-1 19.5.158 C6903: DSC board bus check NG1-2 Relevant parts DSC board (SC-507) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...
Page 883: C8102: Turn Around Pressure Welding Alienation Trouble
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.161 C8102: Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble Relevant parts Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) DF control board (DFCB) Reverse roller sensor (PS7) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for —...
Page 884: C8104: Glass Movement Trouble
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.163 C8104: Glass movement trouble Relevant parts Original glass moving unit Original glass position control board (OGPCB) Original glass moving motor (M202) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the motor and sensor connectors for —...
Page 885: C8302: Cooling Fan Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.165 C8302: Cooling fan failure Relevant parts Cooling fan (FM1) DF control board (DFCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector of FM1 for proper —...
Page 886: C9401: Exposure Turning On The Lamp Trouble Detection
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.167 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection 19.5.168 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection Relevant parts Exposure unit Inverter board (INVB) Flat cable CCD board (CCDB) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...
Page 887: Cc001: Vendor Connection Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.172 CC001: Vendor connection failure Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor (Japan) Coin vendor kit (North America, Europe) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the vendor connector for proper —...
Page 888: Cc156: Adf Rom Error
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.177 CC156: ADF ROM error Relevant parts DF control board (DFCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Disconnect and then connect the power — — cord. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec.
Page 889: Cc159: Rom Contents Error Upon Startup (Dsc1)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.180 CC159: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC1) 19.5.181 CC15A: ROM contents error upon startup (DSC2) Relevant parts DSC board (SC-507) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the DSC board connector for proper —...
Page 890: Cc163: Rom Contents Error (Prt)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.183 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Rewrite the firmware. — —...
Page 891: Cc164: Rom Contents Error (Msc)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.184 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC) Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the ROM version. — — Rewrite the firmware.
Page 892: Cc170: Dynamic Link Error During Starting (Ap0)
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.186 CC170: Dynamic link error during starting (AP0) 19.5.187 CC171: Dynamic link error during starting (AP1) 19.5.188 CC172: Dynamic link error during starting (AP2) 19.5.189 CC173: Dynamic link error during starting (AP3) 19.5.190 CC174: Dynamic link error during starting (AP4) 19.5.191 CC180: Dynamic link error during starting (LDR) 19.5.192 CC181: Dynamic link error during starting (IBR)
Page 893: Cd002: Job Ram Save Error
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.199 CD002: JOB RAM save error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the hard disk connector for proper — —...
Page 894: Cd011: Hard Disk Out Of Specifications Mounted
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.204 CD011: Hard disk out of specifications mounted Relevant parts Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the hard disk specifications. — — Change the hard disk. —...
Page 895: Cd201: File Memory Mounting Error
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.207 CD201: File memory mounting error 19.5.208 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy 19.5.209 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Memory WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check to see if the memory on MFPB is —...
Page 896: Cd241: Encryption Asic Setting Error
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.213 CD241: Encryption ASIC setting error 19.5.214 CD242: EncryptionASIC mounting error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the MFP board connector for proper —...
Page 897: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.217 CD271: i-Option activated and additional memory not installed Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Memory for i-Option (UK-203) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the memory (UK-203) for proper —...
Page 898: Cd401: Nack Command Incorrect
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.219 CD401: NACK command incorrect 19.5.220 CD402: ACK command incorrect 19.5.221 CD403: Checksum error 19.5.222 CD404: Receiving packet incorrect 19.5.223 CD405: Receiving packet analysis error 19.5.224 CD406: ACK receiving timeout 19.5.225 CD407: Retransmission timeout Relevant parts MFP board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM...
Page 899: Cd3##: Nvram Data Error
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.232 CD3##: NVRAM data error • When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for res- toration. • Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected, which can be restored with one restoration command.
Page 900: Ce002: Message And Method Parameter Failure
19. TROUBLE CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19.5.233 CE002: Message and method parameter failure Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it —...
Page 901: Ceee3: Printer Control Board Malfunction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 19. TROUBLE CODE 19.5.236 CEEE3: Printer control board malfunction Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the PRCB connector for proper — — connection and correct as necessary. Change PRCB —...
Page 902: Network Error Code
20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE 20.1 Display procedure • It displays the error code when a network error occurred. • Network error code is displayed only when the following setting is in “Display.” [Administrator Settings] [Network Settings] [Detail Settings]...
Page 903 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Function Code Description IEEE802.1X • Access to the server to check for expiration of the server certificate has timed out (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/PEAP). • Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size that has been retrieved to check for the expiration of the server certificate exceeds the maximum capacity that can be retained (1MB) (EAP-TLS/EAP-TTLS/ PEAP).
Page 904 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Function Code Description LDAP 2244 • Unable to check for expiration because the CRL size exceeds the maxi- mum capacity that can be retained (1MB). 2261 • The format of the LDAP server certificate is invalid. 2263 •...
Page 905 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Function Code Description E-Mail/ 2268 • No certificate is sent from the server. Internet Fax • Parameter error (e.g. the file name is NULL). transmission • Parameter is invalid. • The specified protocol is unavailable. •...
Page 906 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Function Code Description 4105 • Other errors to which an error code is not assigned. transmission 10000 • Failed in authentication using a PKI card. 12236 • The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started. 12239 •...
Page 907 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Function Code Description SMTP • SMTP server error. Temporary authentication failure. transmission • SMTP server error. Unable to queue a message to the node. • SMTP server error. The node is not permitted. •...
Page 908 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Function Code Description SMTP 2268 • No certificate is sent from the server. transmission 3000 • An unexpected error occurred. 3001 • An unexpected error occurred within the library being used. 3002 •...
Page 909 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Function Code Description WebDAV • Proxy authentication error. transmission 1001 • The server does not support WebDAV. • Unable to upload data to the server. 1002 • The intermediate resource is not a collection (directory) (e.g. the speci- fied folder does not exist).
Page 910 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Function Code Description SMB browsing • The connection has been interrupted. • The specified protocol is unavailable. • Failed to connect to the server. • The device is not connected to the network. •...
Page 911 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Function Code Description SMB browsing 12267 • The device certificate does not exist. 12268 • No certificate is sent from the server. User • Invalid parameter (e.g. the number of characters exceeds the limit, authentication blank).
Page 912 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Function Code Description WebDAV client • A timeout occurred while sending data to the WebDAV server. • Failed to connect to the proxy server. • The proxy server rejected the connection request. •...
Page 913 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 20. NETWORK ERROR CODE Function Code Description WS scan • The RetrieveImage waiting period has timed out. 2236 • The certificate has expired, or the validity period has not yet started. 2238 • The CN field of the certificate does not match the server address. 2239 •...
Page 914: Power Supply Trouble
Result Action (Location) Check that the fusing unit is securely — Reconnect. plugged in. (Only for d-Color MF651) Is a power voltage supplied across K-24 Check the WIRING from PJ001DCPU-1 and 2 on DCPU? the wall outlet to SW1 PJ001.
Page 915: Power Is Not Supplied To Adf
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 21. POWER SUPPLY TROUBLE 21.3 Power is not supplied to ADF WIRING Step Check item DIAGRAM Result Action (Location) Is DC24 V being output from CN610 on Q-21 Malfunction in ADF ADF? Is DC24 V being output from PJ013-3 on K-26 Check wiring from DCPU DCPU?
Page 916: Image Quality Problem
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.1 How to read element date • As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for “State Confirmation” available from “Service Mode” can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem. A0P0F4E515DA 22.1.1 Table number...
Page 917: Level History 1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.1.2 Level history 1 A0P0F4E517DA TCR-C • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments). TCR-M • Standard value: 6 to 8 % TCR-Y • Relevant components: TCR sensor TCR-K IDC1 •...
Page 918: Level History 2
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.1.3 Level history 2 A0P0F4E518DA IDC Sensor Adjust 1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value. IDC Sensor Adjust 2 • It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. •...
Page 919: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.2 How to identify problematic part • This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial check items” and “Troubleshooting proce- dure by a particular image quality problem.” • When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial check items” and, if the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem.”...
Page 920 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 B. Initial check items 2 • Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attrib- utable to the scanner or printer system. Document scan CCD board (CCDB) Scanner system...
Page 921 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM C. Initial check items 3 • If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 colors Mono color A0P0F4C511DA...
Page 922: Solution
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3 Solution NOTE • Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed with A3 setting. 22.3.1 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in sub scan direction A.
Page 923 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM (2) When the ADF is used Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. Change original. ADF reading section Glass is dirty. Clean. ADF scanning guide ADF scanning guide is damaged Clean.
Page 924: Scanner System: White Lines, White Bands, Colored Lines And Colored Bands In Main Scan Direction
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.2 Scanner system: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines White bands Color lines Color bands A02EF4C508DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item...
Page 925: Scanner System: Color Spots
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.3 Scanner system: color spots A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C509DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original. Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.
Page 926: Scanner System: Fog
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.4 Scanner system: fog A. Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD A02EF4C510DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original. Original pad is dirty.
Page 927: Scanner System: Blurred Image, Blotchy Image
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C511DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original. ADF does not lie flat.
Page 928 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction) A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C512DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.
Page 929: Scanner System: Moire
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.7 Scanner system: moire A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C513DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Moire distortions recur even after Change the original mode the orientation of original has been (select one other than that changed.
Page 930: Scanner System: Skewed Image
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C514DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is skew. YES Reposition original. Original glass Original glass is in positive contact Reinstall the glass.
Page 931: Scanner System: Distorted Image
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C515DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Installation Machine is installed on a level sur- Reinstall.
Page 932: Scanner System: Low Image Density, Rough Image
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C516DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original glass Original Glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.
Page 933: Scanner System: Defective Acs
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS A. Typical faulty images Colored area of original ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Black-and-white area of original ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C517DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Auto Color Level...
Page 934: Scanner System: Blank Copy, Black Copy
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy A. Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy A02EF4C518DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Reconnect.
Page 935: Scanner System: Abnormal Image
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE Data on ABCDE previous ABCDE page ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on ABCDE current page ABCDE A02EF4C519DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result...
Page 936: Scanner System: Uneven Density
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C520DA B. Troubleshooting procedure (1) When the original glass is used Step Section Check item Result Action 2nd/3rd mirrors Exposure unit is not properly YES Perform “Focus positioning of the carriage aligned with 2nd/3rd mirrors car-...
Page 937: Printer Monocolor: White Lines, White Bands, Colored Lines And Colored Bands In Sub Scan Direction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.15 Printer monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines White bands Colored lines Colored bands A02EF4C507DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item...
Page 938: Printer Monocolor: White Lines, White Bands, Colored Lines And Colored Bands In Main Scan Direction
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.16 Printer monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images Colored bands White bands Colored lines White lines A02EF4C508DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item...
Page 939: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.17 Printer monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C520DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action High image Uneven density in sub scan direc- YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of density original tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to...
Page 940: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.18 Printer monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C521DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Machine The problem has been eliminated Go to next step. LD adjust- through the LD lightness balance ment...
Page 941: Printer Monocolor: Low Image Density
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.19 Printer monocolor: low image density A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C516DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
Page 942 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 Step Section Check item Result Action Hopper unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect. Gear is cracked. YES Change gear. Image Process Toner is properly supplied when Go to next step. Adjustment TCR toner supply is run.
Page 943: Printer Monocolor: Gradation Reproduction Failure
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.20 Printer monocolor: gradation reproduction failure A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C522DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
Page 944: Printer Monocolor: Foggy Background
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.21 Printer monocolor: foggy background A. Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD A02EF4C510DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
Page 945 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Step Section Check item Result Action Image Process “Conv. Value” falls within the YES Go to step 17. Adjustment specified range as checked through Gradation gradation adjust. Adjust Dark: 0 ± 100 (Service Mode) Highlight: 0 ±...
Page 946: Printer Monocolor: Void Areas, White Spots
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.22 Printer monocolor: void areas, white spots A. Typical faulty images Void areas White spots A02EF4C523DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front See P.881 side or high density section.
Page 947: Printer Monocolor: Colored Spots
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.23 Printer monocolor: colored spots A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C524DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Imaging unit Developing bias contact terminal Clean contact terminal and makes good connection. check terminal position.
Page 948: Printer Monocolor: Blurred Image
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.24 Printer monocolor: blurred image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C511DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action PH unit The surface of the PH window is YES Clean with cleaning jig. dirty.
Page 949: Printer Monocolor: Blank Copy, Black Copy
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.25 Printer monocolor: blank copy, black copy A. Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy A02EF4C518DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check A blank copy occurs. YES Check PH unit connector for proper connection.
Page 950: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Image
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C525DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.
Page 951: Printer 4-Color: White Lines, White Bands, Colored Lines And Colored Bands In Sub Scan Direction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines White bands Colored lines Colored bands A02EF4C507DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item...
Page 952: Printer 4-Color: White Lines, White Bands, Colored Lines And Colored Bands In Main Scan Direction
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.28 Printer 4-color: white lines, white bands, colored lines and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines White bands Colored lines Colored bands A02EF4C508DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item...
Page 953: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.29 Printer 4-color: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C526DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent.
Page 954: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.30 Printer 4-color: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C521DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean with specified solvent.
Page 955: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.31 Printer 4-color: low image density A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C516DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.
Page 956: Printer 4-Color: Poor Color Reproduction
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C527DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.
Page 957: Printer 4-Color: Incorrect Color Image Registration
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C512DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
Page 958: Printer 4-Color: Void Areas, White Spots
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.34 Printer 4-color: void areas, white spots A. Typical faulty images Void areas White spots A02EF4C523DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check There are void areas at the front See P.896 side or high density section.
Page 959: Printer 4-Color: Colored Spots
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.35 Printer 4-color: colored spots A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C509DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is YES Change imaging unit. scratched.
Page 960: Printer 4-Color: Poor Fusing Performance, Offset
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance, offset A. Typical faulty images Poor fusing performance Offset A02EF4C528DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.
Page 961: Printer 4-Color: Brush Effect, Blurred Image
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.37 Printer 4-color: brush effect, blurred image A. Typical faulty images Brush effect Blurred image A02EF4C529DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.
Page 962: Printer 4-Color: Back Marking
22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22.3.38 Printer 4-color: back marking A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C530DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action 2nd image trans- Image transfer roller is scratched or YES Change transfer roller unit. fer roller unit dirty.
Page 963: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Image
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 22. IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEM 22.3.39 Printer 4-color: uneven image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C525DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.
Page 964: Ic Protector
23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector 23.1 Outline • To increase product safety, this MFP has an IC protector (ICP) installed in each board. ICP is a component that protects IC. If the amount of the current supplied to the electrical parts such as motor exceeds the set level, ICP trips to protect IC from over current.
Page 965 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector When ICP trips ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code Symptom in each load and others ICP9 Fusing cooling fan motor/1 Fusing cooling fan motor/1’s C-3303 failure to turn Ozone ventilation fan motor Ozone ventilation fan motor’s C-5354 failure to turn...
Page 966 23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 When ICP trips ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code Symptom in each load and others ICP17 IDCS/F IDC registration sensor/F IDC registration sensor/F malfunction IDCS/R IDC registration sensor/R IDC registration sensor/R P-28 malfunction TEMS1 Heating roller temperature...
Page 967 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector C. Paper feed/transport drive board When ICP trips ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code Symptom in each load and others ICP1 LUDB LU drive board LCT feed section/transport sec- —...
Page 968 23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 When ICP trips ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code Symptom in each load and others ICP6 LDDB/ Laser drive board/Y Laser failure C-4501 LDDB/ Laser drive board/M Laser failure C-4501 LDDB/ Laser drive board/C...
Page 969: Df-618
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector H. Scanner relay board When ICP trips ICP No. Symbol Target part name Trouble code Symptom in each load and others PTR1 PS14 Empty sensor JAM caused by the last original —...
Page 970: Lu-301/Lu-204
23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others Exit motor ADF paper exit section Take-up motor ADF paper feed section JAM Lift-up motor Lift up mechanism failure C-8106 Switchback roller pressure/ Turn around pressure welding alien-...
Page 971: Zu-606
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector 23.2.5 ZU-606 A. ZU control board When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others ICP1 DC5V sensor and others in the Unable to be detected board ICP3 M601 Registration motor Entrance JAM...
Page 972 23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others ICP4 Alignment plate motor/F Side-staple front adjust drive motor C-1103 malfunction Alignment plate motor/R Side-staple rear adjust drive motor C-1140 malfunction Trail edge paddle motor...
Page 973: Sd-508
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector C. Transport control board When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others ICP1 M201 Transport motor Transport section JAM ICP2 FM1 Fan motor/1 Fan motor drive malfunction Fan motor/2 ICP3 DC5V sensor and others in the...
Page 974: Pk-516
23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23.2.8 PK-516 A. Punch control board When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others Output OP punch driving motor mal- ICP1 M302 Punch oscillating motor C-1132 function DC5V sensor and others in the...
Page 975 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 23. IC protector When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others Exit motor JAM or multiple sheets/sets ejection JAM between the accommodation and exit sections. Stapler movement motor Stapler movement drive failure C-11B0 Alignment plate motor...
Page 976: Sd-509
23. IC protector Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 When ICP trips Symbol Relevant parts Trouble code Symbol Symptom in each load and others Paper passage sensor/1 Paper passage sensor/2 PS10 Registration sensor PS30 Punch hole full sensor Lower path sensor PS16 Tray2 paper detection sensor 23.2.11...
Page 977: Parts Layout Drawing
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING APPENDIX 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.1 Main body 24.1.1 Scanner section [17] [16] [18] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5J509DA Scanner motor (M201) [10] Scanner home sensor (PS201) 15 degree sensor (PS202) [11] Exposure lamp (FL201) Original size detection sensor/1 (PS204) [12] Inverter board (INVB)
Page 978: Front Side
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.2 Front side A. Load A0P0F5C522DA IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM12) Toner supply motor/M (M11) IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10) Toner supply motor/C (M10) Toner supply motor/K (M12) Toner supply motor/Y (M9) Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 979 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING B. Board/switch/sensor/others [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C524DA IH power supply (IHPU) Main erase lamp/M (EL/M) Power switch (SW1) [10] Main erase lamp/C (EL/C) Total counter (TCT) [11] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K) Waste toner box set sensor (PS53) [12] Toner empty sensor/Y (RS/Y) Waste toner full sensor (PS54)
Page 980: Back Side
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.3 Back side A. Board [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C518DA MFP board (MFPB) DC power supply (DCPU) NVRAM board (NRB) Service EEPROM board (SVERB) PCI board (PCIB) High voltage unit/2 (HV2) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) [10] Printer control board (PRCB) Relay drive board (REDB)
Page 981 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING B. Load [19] [17] [18] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C519DA Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) [11] Cleaner motor (M38) Transfer belt motor (M1) [12] Color developing motor (M17) K PC drum motor (M18) [13] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Page 982 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 C. Switch/sensor/others [11] [12] [10] A0P0F5C521DA Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41) Pressure welding alienation sensor/color (PS52) Loop amount detection sensor/2 (PS42) Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1) Pressure welding alienation sensor/K Noise filter (NF1) *200 V area only (PS51) Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) [10] USB cover sensor (PS60)
Page 983: Around The Write Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.1.4 Around the write section A0P0F5C511DA PH unit PH cooling fan motor (FM14) Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor PH relay board (REYB/PH) (PS23) Waste toner agitating motor (M20) Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 984: Manual Bypass Tray
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.5 Manual bypass tray [11] [10] A0P0F5C512DA Bypass tray up down motor (M28) Bypass paper width detection resistor (VR1) Bypass paper feed motor (M27) Bypass set sensor (PS30) Bypass sub tray set sensor (PS37) Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34) Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33) [10] Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
Page 985: Tray 1
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.1.6 Tray 1 [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C513DA Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7) Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6) [10] Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS8) Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
Page 986: Tray 2
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.7 Tray 2 [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C514DA Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11) Tray2 paper feed clutch (CL2) Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/1 (PS15) Tray2 door set sensor (PS17) [10] Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14) [11] Tray2 CD Paper size sensor/2 (PS16)
Page 987: Tray 3
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.1.8 Tray 3 [11] [10] A0P0F5C515DA Tray3 near empty sensor (PS20) Paper temperature thermistor (TH8) Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19) Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) Intermediate roller sensor (PS28) Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS22) Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) [10] Tray3 paper feed clutch (CL5) Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
Page 988: Tray 4
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.9 Tray 4 [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C516DA Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58) Tray4 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/4) Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL7) [10] Tray4 dehumidifier heater (DH2) Tray4 near empty sensor (PS25) [11] Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24)
Page 989: Nd Transfer Section
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.1.10 2nd transfer section A0P0F5C523DA Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50) Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS) Suction fan motor (FM1) IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Timing roller sensor (PS38) Registration motor (M2) OHP detection sensor (PS40)
Page 990: Duplex Section
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.1.11 Duplex section A0P0F5C517DA ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47) ADU door sensor (PS49) ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48) ADU transport motor/1 (M31) ADU transport motor/2 (M32) Service Manual Y110571-1...
Page 991: Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.1.12 Fusing/paper exit section [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0P0F5C520DA Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56) Pressure home sensor (PS55) Heating roller temperature sensor/2 [10] IH coil (FH1) (TEMS2) Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5) [11] Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) Heating roller temperature sensor (TEMS1)
Page 992: Df-618/Sp-501
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.2 DF-618/SP-501 [11] [10] [12] A0P0F5C600DA Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) Registration motor (M7) Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) Take-up motor (M2) Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) [10] Exit motor (M3) Stamp solenoid (SD3) * [11] Switch back solenoid (SD1) Lift-up motor (M6)
Page 993 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11] A0P0F5C601DA Length sensor/1 (PS10) [12] Consolidation/2 (PS18) Length sensor/3 (PS12) [13] Consolidation/1 (PS19) Length sensor/2 (PS11) [14] Reverse registration sensor (PS8) Lift-up upper sensor (PS16) [15] Before read sensor (PS9) Empty sensor (PS14)
Page 994: Lu-301 (Option)
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.3 LU-301 (Option) [13] [12] [11] [10] A03NF5C500DA LU door switch (MS1) Tray set sensor (PS1) Near empty sensor /2 (PS6) Lift-up motor (M1) Paper empty sensor(PS4) [10] Paper feed motor (M2) Tray LED(LED) [11] Transport motor (M3) Dehumidification heater (DH)
Page 995: Lu-204 (Option)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.4 LU-204 (Option) [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0TJF5C500DA LU door switch (MS1) Upper limit sensor(PS2) Near empty sensor /2 (PS6) Tray set sensor/1 (PS1) Paper empty sensor(PS4) [10] Lift-up motor (M1) Tray LED(LED) [11] Paper feed motor (M2) Dehumidification heater (DH)
Page 996: Js-504 (Option)
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.5 JS-504 (Option) [13] [12] [11] [10] A0D5F5C500DA Upper tray exit sensor (PS2) Upper tray paper full detect board/LED (T2FDTB/LED) Lower tray exit sensor (PS1) Route change motor (M3) Route change home sensor (PS4) [10] Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR) Shift motor (M2)
Page 997: Js-603 (Option)
Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 24.6 JS-603 (Option) A10FF5C500DA Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17) Tray3 full sensor (PS36) Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35) Y110571-1 Service Manual...
Page 998: Zu-606 (Option)
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.7 ZU-606 (Option) [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A07TF5C500DA Main motor cooling fan (FM601) Coil (COIL) Punch shift motor (M605) [10] DC power supply/1 (DCPU1) Punch shift home sensor (PS605) [11] Door switch (MS602) ZU control board (ZUCB) [12] DC power supply/2 (DCPU2)
Page 999 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING [10] [11] A07TF5C501DA Main motor (M606) 2nd folding stopper motor (M603) Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610) Gate solenoid/Up (SD602) Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601) Conveyance sensor (PS601) Registration motor (M601) [10] 1st folding stopper motor (M602) 2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604) [11] 1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603) Exit sensor (PS609)
Page 1000: Ot-503 (Option)
24. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jul. 2009 24.8 OT-503 (Option) A092F5C500DA Exit paper cooling fun motor/2 (FM102) Exit paper cooling fun motor/1 (FM101) Exit paper cooling fun motor/3 (FM103) Service Manual Y110571-1...

This manual is also suitable for:

D-color mf551 D-color mf451

Olivetti d-Color MF651 Service Manual

D-Color MF651/MF551/MF451 Main Body

Outline

Adjustment/Setting

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Olivetti d-Color MF651

Summary of Contents for Olivetti d-Color MF651